JVC CD Player KD G320 User Manual

CD RECEIVER

KD-AR370/KD-G320

RECEPTOR CON CD

RECEPTEUR CD

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 7.

Para cancelar la demostración en pantalla, consulte la página 7.

Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 7.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

Para la instalación y las conexiones, refiérase al manual separado.

Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.

For customer Use:

Enter below the Model

No. and Serial No. which

are located on the top or

bottom of the cabinet.

Retain this information

for future reference.

INSTRUCTIONS

MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES

MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS

Model No.

Serial No.

GET0349-001A

[J]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to read this manual

• Button operations are mainly explained with

the illustrations in the table below.

CONTENTS

• Some related tips and notes are explained in

“More about this unit” (see pages 20 – 22).

Control panel — KD-AR370 and KD-G320 .......

Remote controller — ^RM-RK50..............

Getting started.................................

Basic operations....................................................

Press briefly.

Radio operations ..............................

Press repeatedly.

Disc operations.................................

Playing a disc in the unit ......................................

Playing discs in the CD changer ............................

Press either

one.

Sound adjustments........................... 11

General settings — PSM ................... 12

Satellite radio operations.................. 15

iPod®/D. player operations ................ 18

Other external component operations... 20

More about this unit ......................... 20

Maintenance .................................... 23

Troubleshooting............................... 24

Specifications................................... 27

Press and hold until your

desired response begins.

Press and hold both

buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations.

: Indicator displayed for the

corresponding operation.

How to detach/attach the control

panel

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving,

be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be

involved in a traffic accident.

Detaching...

Attaching...

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as

this will block outside sounds, making driving

dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any

complicated operations.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot

or cold weather, wait until the temperature in

the car becomes normal before operating the

unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control panel — _{KD-AR370 and KD-G320}

KD-G612/KD-G611/KD-G511

Control panel —

Parts identification

Display window

1 4 /¢

buttons

Display window

a Disc information indicators—TAG (ID3

(standby/on attenuator) button

3 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

4 Loading slot

5 Display window

6 0 (eject) button

7 EQ (equalizer) button

8 Remote sensor

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong

light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

9 SRC (source) button

p BAND button

Tag),

(folder),

(track/file)

s Disc type indicators—WMA, MP3

d Playback source indicators—

CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is

selected as the playback source.

DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player.

f Playback mode / item indicators—

RND (random),

RPT (repeat)

g LOUD (loudness) indicator

h EQ (equalizer) indicator

j Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)

indicators—JAZZ, CLASSIC, HIP HOP,

POPS, ROCK, USER

(disc),

(folder),

q Control dial

w SEL (select) button

e MO (monaural) button

r SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

button

k Tr (track) indicator

l Source display / Volume level indicator

/ Main display

z Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),

MO (monaural)

t Number buttons

y RPT (repeat) button

u RND (random) button

i MODE button

o DISP (display) button

;

(control panel release) button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Main elements and features

Remote controller —

RM-RK50

Installing the lithium coin battery

(CR2025)

(standby/on/attenuator) button

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is

on.

Aim the remote controller directly at the

remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is

no obstacle in between.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons

• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.

• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA

discs.

Warning:

• Do not install any battery other than

CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may

explode.

• Store the battery in a place where children

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,

cracking, or starting a fire:

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat

the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

– Do not leave the battery with other

metallic materials.

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or

similar tools.

• While playing an MP3 disc on an

MP3-compatible CD changer:

– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

– Changes the folder if pressed and held.

• While listening to the satellite (SIRIUS or

XM) radio:

– Changes the categories.

• While listening to an Apple iPod or a

JVC D. player:

– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with

D ∞.

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate

when throwing away or saving it.

– Enters the main menu with 5 U.

(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the

menu selecting buttons.)*

3 VOL – / VOL + buttons

• Adjusts the volume level.

Caution:

* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.

D ∞ : Confirms the selection.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 SOUND button

• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom

equalizer).

5 SOURCE button

• For FM/AM tuner

• For SIRIUS radio

• For XM radio

• Selects the source.

6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if

pressed and held.

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

• While listening to the satellite radio:

– Changes the channels if pressed briefly.

– Changes the channels rapidly if pressed

and held.

• While listening to an iPod or a D. player

(in menu selecting mode):

– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,

press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)

– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and

held.

⁄

Adjust the volume.

Volume level appears.

Getting started

Basic operations

Volume level indicator

Turn on the power.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 11 and 12.)

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared

with other sources. Lower the volume

before playing a disc to avoid damaging

the speakers by the sudden increase of the

output level.

To drop the volume in a

moment (ATT)

To restore the sound, press

it again.

* You cannot select these sources if they

are not ready or not connected.

To turn off the power

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Start searching for a station.

Basic settings

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages

12 – 14.

When a station is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

1 Canceling the display

demonstrations

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”

2 Setting the clock

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust

the hour.

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then

adjust the minute.

2 Select a desired station frequency.

3 Finish the procedure.

To check the current clock

time when the power is

turned off

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to

receive

Radio operations

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be

lost.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO

indicator goes off.

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

Selected band appears.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Storing stations in memory

Listening to a preset station

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential

Memory)

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you

want.

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you

want to store into.

To check the other information while

listening to an FM or AM station

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when

automatic presetting is over.

Clock Ô Frequency

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically in the FM

band.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset

Disc operations

number 4 of the FM1 band.

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you

change the source or eject the disc.

To stop play and eject the

disc

Preset number flashes for a while.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.

* If you have changed the external input

setting to “EXT IN” (see page 14), you

cannot select the CD changer.

To go to the next or previous folders (only for

MP3 or WMA discs)

Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 – 06:

For MP3 discs:

For WMA discs:

For disc number from 07 – 12:

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly

To select a number from 01 – 06:

About MP3 and WMA discs

MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and

“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded

in “folders.”

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC

To select a number from 07 – 12:

MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.

• You can also connect other CH-X series CD

changers (except CH-X99 and CH-X100).

These units are not compatible with MP3

discs.

• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD

changer.

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA

discs, it is required that folders are assigned

with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their

folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

• You cannot use the KD-MK series CD

changers with this unit.

• Disc text information recorded in the CD

Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text

compatible CD changer is connected.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

To select a

particular track in a

folder (for MP3 or

WMA discs):

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other main functions

Changing the display information

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks

within the same folder.

While playing an MP3 or a WMA^*²disc

• When “TAG DISP” is set to

“TAG ON” (see page 14)

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track

whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

• When “TAG DISP” is set to

“TAG OFF”

Each time you press the button, you can

skip 10 tracks.

• After the last track, the first track will be

selected and vice versa.

: Clock with the current track number

: Elapsed playing time with the

current track number

If the current disc is an audio CD,

“NO NAME” appears.

Only for the built-in CD player.

If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag

information, folder name and file name

appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will

not light up.

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting the playback modes

Sound adjustments

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to

the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

You can use only one of the following playback

modes at a time.

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

Ex.: When “ROCK” is selected

Mode

Plays repeatedly

Preset values

BAS

TRE

LOUD

TRK RPT

: The current track.

(bass) (treble) (loudness)

Indication (For)

FLDR RPT*¹: All tracks of the current

USER

folder.

DISC RPT*²: All tracks of the current

disc.

OFF

(Flat sound)

ROCK

+03

+01

+04

+02

+01

–02

+01

RPT OFF

: Cancels.

(Rock or disco music)

Random play

CLASSIC

OFF

(Classical music)

POPS

Mode

Plays at random

(Light music)

FLDR RND*¹: All tracks of the current

folder, then tracks of the

HIP HOP

(Funk or rap music)

next folder and so on.

JAZZ

+03

OFF

(Jazz music)

DISC RND

: All tracks of the current

disc.

MAG RND*²: All tracks of the inserted

discs.

: Cancels.

Adjusting the sound

RND OFF

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your

preference.

Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA

disc.

Only while playing discs in the CD

changer.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General settings — PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)

items (except “SID”) listed in the table that

follows.

Indication [Range]

BAS*¹(bass)

Adjust the bass. [–06 to +06]

TRE*¹(treble)

Adjust the treble. [–06 to +06]

2 Select a PSM item.

FAD*²(fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

[R06 to F06]

BAL*³(balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

[L06 to R06]

LOUD*¹(loudness)

Ex.: When “DIMMER” is selected

Boost low and high frequencies to produce

a well-balanced sound at low volume level.

[LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.

SUB.W*⁴(subwoofer)

Adjust the subwoofer output level. [00 to 08]

VOL (volume)

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other

Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*⁵]

PSM items if necessary.

When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,

the adjustment you have made is stored for

the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)

including “USER.”

5 Finish the procedure.

If you are using a two-speaker system, set the

fader level to “00.”

This adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer

output.

This takes effect only when a subwoofer is

connected.

Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to

“WOOFER” (see page 14).

Depending on the amplifier gain control

setting. (See page 14 for details.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indications

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DEMO

DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated

Display

demonstration

automatically if no operation is done for about 20 seconds,

[7].

DEMO OFF : Cancels.

1 – 12, [7]

[Initial: 1 (1:00)]

CLOCK H

Hour adjustment

00 – 59, [7]

[Initial: 00 (1:00)]

CLOCK M

Minute adjustment

CLK ADJ*¹

Clock adjustment

AUTO

OFF

: [Initial]; The built-in clock is automatically adjusted using

the clock data provided via the satellite radio channel.

: Cancels.

T-ZONE*¹, *²

Select your residential area from one of the following time zones for clock

adjustment.

Time zone

EASTERN [Initial] “ ATLANTIC “ NEWFOUND “ ALASKA “

PACIFIC “ MOUNTAIN “ CENTRAL “ (back to the beginning)

DST*¹, *²

Activate this if your residential area is subject to DST.

: [Initial]; Activates daylight savings time.

: Cancels.

Daylight savings

time

OFF

SID*³

SIRIUS ID

The 12-digit SIRIUS identification number scrolls on the display 5 seconds

after “SID” is selected, [15].

• Press SEL to resume the previous display.

DIMMER

Dimmer

OFF

: Dims the display illumination of this unit.

: [Initial]; Cancels.

TEL*⁴

Telephone muting

MUTING 1/MUTING 2: Select either one which mutes the sounds while

using a cellular phone.

OFF

: [Initial]; Cancels.

SCROLL*⁵

Scroll

ONCE

AUTO

OFF

: [Initial]; Scrolls the disc information once.

: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).

: Cancels.

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless

of the setting.

Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite radio is connected.

Displayed only when “CLK ADJ” is set to “AUTO.”

Displayed only when SIRIUS Satellite radio is connected.

Only for KD-AR370.

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indications

Selectable settings, [reference page]

WOOFER*¹

LOW

MID

: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

: [Initial]; Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the

subwoofer.

Subwoofer cutoff

frequency

HIGH

: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

EXT IN*²

External input

CHANGER

: [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [9], a JVC compatible

satellite (SIRIUS/XM) tuner, [15], an Apple iPod or a JVC

D. player, [18].

EXT IN

: To use any other external component than the above,

[20].

When connecting amplifiers and/or subwoofer, set this correctly.

L/O MODE

Line output mode

REAR

: [Initial]; Select if the both LINE OUT terminals are

used for connecting the speakers through the external

amplifiers.

WOOFER

: Select if the FRONT LINE OUT terminals are used for

connecting a subwoofer through an external amplifier.

TAG DISP

Tag display

TAG ON

: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/

WMA tracks, [10].

: Cancels.

TAG OFF

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.

LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of

AMP GAIN

Amplifier gain

control

the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from being

damaged.)

HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50

AREA

AREA US

AREA SA

AREA EU

: [Initial]; When using in North/Central/South America.

Tuner channel

interval

AM/FM intervals are set to 10 kHz/200 kHz.

: When using in South American countries where FM

interval is 100 kHz. AM interval is set to 10 kHz.

: When using in any other areas. AM/FM intervals are set

to 9 kHz/50 kHz (100 kHz during auto search).

Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”

Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, or DISC.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Activate your SIRIUS subscription after

connection:

Satellite radio operations

This unit is satellite (SAT) Radio Ready—

compatible with both SIRIUS Satellite radio and

XM Satellite radio.

Before operating your satellite radio:

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• Refer also to the Instructions supplied with

your SIRIUS Satellite radio or XM Satellite

radio.

JVC DLP starts updating all the SIRIUS

channels.

Once completed, JVC DLP tunes in to the

preset channel, CH184.

• “SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo are

registered trademarks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio

Inc.

• XM and its corresponding logos are registered

trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.

• “SAT Radio,” the SAT Radio logo and all

related marks are trademarks of SIRIUS

Satellite Radio Inc., and XM Satellite Radio,

Inc.

3 Check your SIRIUS ID, see page 13.

4 Contact SIRIUS on the internet at

<http://activate.siriusradio.com/> to

activate your subscription, or you can

call SIRIUS toll-free at 1-888-539-

SIRIUS (7474).

“SUB UPDT PRESS ANY KEY” scrolls

on the display once subscription has been

completed.

Listening to the satellite radio

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

Activate your XM subscription after

connection:

• JVC SIRIUS radio DLP—Down Link

Processor, for listening to the SIRIUS Satellite

radio.

• Only Channel 0, 1, and 247 are available

before activation.

• XMDirect Universal Tuner Box using a

JVC Smart Digital Adapter—XMDJVC100

(not supplied), for listening to the XM

Satellite radio.

GCI (Global Control Information) update:

• If channels are updated after subscription,

updating starts automatically.

“UPDATING” flashes and no sound can be

heard.

XMDirect Universal Tuner Box starts

updating all the XM channels. “Channel 1”

is tuned in automatically.

• Update takes a few minutes to complete.

• During update, you cannot operate your

satellite radio.

3 Check your XM Satellite radio

ID labelled on the casing of the

XMDirect Universal Tuner Box, or

tune into “Channel 0” (see page 17).

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

4 Contact XM Satellite radio on

the internet at <http://xmradio.

com/activation/> to activate your

subscription, or you can call 1-800-

XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346).

Once completed, the unit tunes in to one

of the available channels (Channel 4 or

higher).

Listening to the XM Satellite radio

3 Select a channel for listening.

Listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio

Holding the button changes the channels

rapidly.

Searching for category/channel

You can search for programs by category

(Category Search) or channel number (Channel

Search).

3 Select a category.

• In Category Search, you can tune in to the

channels of the selected category. Category

Search begins from the currently selected

channel. The selected channel number flashes

on the display.

• In Channel Search, you can tune in to

all channels (including non-categorised

channels).

You can tune in to all the channels of every

category by selecting “ALL.”

Selecting a particular category (SPORTS,

ENTERTAINMENT, etc.) allows you to

enjoy only the channels from the selected

category.

1 Select a category (Category Search).

• For Channel Search, skip

this step.

4 Select a channel for listening.

Holding the button changes the channels

rapidly.

• When changing the category or channel,

invalid and unsubscribed channels are

skipped.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

2 Select a channel for listening.

Current channel number

Storing channels in memory

You can preset six channels for each band.

Ex.: Storing a channel into preset number 4.

1 Tune in to a channel you want.

Ex.: When you select “COUNTRY” for Category Search

If no operation is done for about

Preset number flashes for a while.

15 seconds, Category Search is canceled.

In Channel Search, channel name and

channel number appear on the display

during search.

Listening to a preset channel

1 Select either SIRIUS Satellite radio or

• While searching, invalid and unsubscribed

channels are skipped.

XM Satellite radio.

Checking the XM Satellite radio ID

While selecting “XM1,” “XM2,” or

“XM3,” select “Channel 0.”

3 Select the preset channel (1 – 6) you

want.

The display alternately shows “RADIO ID” and

the 8-digit (alphanumeric) ID number.

To change the display information while

listening to a channel

To cancel the ID number display, select any

channel other than “Channel 0.”

Clock = Category name = Channel name =

Artist name = Composer name* = Song/program

name/title = (back to the beginning)

* Only for SIRIUS Satellite radio.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 11 and 12.)

• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or

D. player is deactivated.

iPod®/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod

or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

To pause*¹or

stop*²playback

To resume

playback, press it

again.

• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for

controlling an iPod.

• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for

controlling a D. player.

To fast-forward or

reverse the track

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

with the interface adapter.

To go to the next

or previous tracks

Caution:

For iPod

For D. player

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the

vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting

or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

Selecting a track from the menu

Preparations:

Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the

external input setting, see page 14.

1 Enter the main menu.

Now the 5/∞/4 /¢

buttons

work as the menu selecting buttons*³.

2 Select the desired menu.

Playback starts automatically from

where it has been paused*¹or stopped*²

previously.

Adjust the volume.

For iPod:

PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS

Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the

beginning)

For D. player:

PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE

Ô TRACK Ô (back to the beginning)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Confirm the selection.

Random play

To move back to the previous

menu, press 5.

ALBM RND*⁴

Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of

the iPod.

• If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.

• If the selected item has another layer, you

will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3

until the desired track is played.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of the

iPod or “Random Play On” of the D. player.

• Holding 4 /¢

items at a time.

can skip 10

RND OFF

Cancels.

The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

If no operations are done for about

For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in

“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”

–

5 seconds.

–

When you confirm the selection of a track.

To check other information while listening to

an iPod or a D. player

Selecting the playback modes

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

ONE RPT

Functions the same as “Repeat One” of

the iPod or “Repeat Mode One” for the

D. player.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as “Repeat All” of the

iPod or “Repeat Mode All” for the D. player.

RPT OFF

Cancels.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other external component More about this unit

operations

Basic operations

Turning on the power

You can connect an external component to

the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line

Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX

Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also

turn on the power. If the source is ready,

playback also starts.

Turning off the power

• If you turn off the power while listening to a

disc, disc play will start from where playback

has been stopped previously, next time you

turn on the power.

For listening to the satellite radio, iPod, or

D. player, refer to pages 15 – 19.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

• During SSM search...

– All previously stored stations are erased and

stations are stored newly.

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

– When SSM is over, the station stored in

No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the

previously preset station is erased when a new

station is stored in the same preset number.

If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 14

and select the external input (“EXT IN”).

Turn on the connected component

and start playing the source.

Adjust the volume.

Disc operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does

not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital

Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-

DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may

not be recommended.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 11 and 12.)

To check the other information while

listening to an external component

General

Clock Ô EXT IN

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/

CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),

MP3 and WMA formats.

• When a disc had been loaded, selecting

“DISC” for the playback source starts disc

play.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Inserting a disc

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

• When a disc is inserted upside down, the disc

automatically ejects.

• Do not insert 8 cm (3-3/16") discs (single CD)

and unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.)

into the loading slot.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>

(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums,

artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,

2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA

files.

• This unit can display only one-byte

characters. No other characters can be

correctly displayed.

Playing a disc

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3

or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent

sounds.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

meeting the conditions below:

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can play back only files of the same

type which are first detected if a disc includes

both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/

WMA files.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs;

however, unclosed sessions will be skipped

while playing.

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play

back on this unit because of their disc

characteristics, or for the following reasons:

– Discs are dirty or scratched.

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens

inside the unit.

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are

written with “Packet Write” method.

– There are improper recording conditions

(missing data, etc.) or media conditions

(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time

since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than

that of regular CDs.

– Sampling frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,

Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

• The maximum number of characters for file/

folder names vary among the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo: up to 128 characters

– Joliet: up to 64 characters

– Windows long file name: up to 128

characters

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR

(variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy

in elapsed time display, and do not show

the actual elapsed time. Especially, after

performing the search function, this

difference becomes noticeable.

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of

200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective

seal stuck to the surface.

– Discs on which labels can be directly

printed by an ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperatures or

high humidities may cause malfunctions or

damage to the unit.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and

MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate

format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

– WMA files which are not based upon

• To know more about SIRIUS Satellite radio or

to sign up, visit «http://www.sirius.com».

• For the latest channel listings and

programming information, or to sign up for

XM Satellite radio, visit «http://www.xmradio.

com».

iPod® or D. player operations

• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D. player is charged through this unit.

• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all

operations from the iPod or D. player are

disabled. Perform all operations from this

unit.

• The text information may not be displayed

correctly.

– Some characters such as accented letters

cannot be shown correctly on the display.

– Depends on the condition of

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

Changing the source

• If you change the source, playback also stops

(without ejecting the disc).

Next time you select “DISC” for the playback

source, disc play starts from where it has been

stopped previously.

communication between the iPod or

D. player and the unit.

• If the text information includes more than

8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see

also page 13). This unit can display up to 40

characters.

Ejecting a disc

• If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted

again into the loading slot to protect it from

dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

Notice:

When connecting an iPod or a D. player,

some operations may not be performed

correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the

following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

General settings—PSM

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the

volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the

unit automatically changes the volume level to

“VOL 30.”

Satellite radio operations

• You can also connect the JVC SIRIUS radio

PnP (Plug and Play), using the JVC SIRIUS

radio adapter, KS-U100K (not supplied) to

the CD changer jack on the rear.

By turning on/off the power of the unit, you

can turn on/off the JVC PnP. However, you

cannot control it from this unit.

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States

and/or other countries.

• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

To keep discs clean

Maintenance

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it

with a soft cloth in a straight line

from center to edge.

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the

• Do not use any solvent (for example,

conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,

benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe

the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth

moistened with alcohol, being careful not to

damage the connectors.

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough

spots around the inner and outer

edges. If such a disc is used, this

unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges

with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the

CD player in the following cases:

Do not use the following discs:

• After starting the heater in the car.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the CD player may

malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and

leave the unit turned on for a few hours until

the moisture evaporates.

Warped disc

Sticker

Sticker residue

How to handle discs

Stick-on label

When removing a disc from

its case, press down the center

holder of the case and lift the

disc out, holding it by the edges.

• Always hold the disc by the

Center holder

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert

the disc around the center holder (with the

printed surface facing up).

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after

use.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service

center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the

speakers.

• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

• The unit does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

Store stations manually.

• SSM automatic presetting does not

work.

• Static noise while listening to the

radio.

Connect the antenna firmly.

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played

back.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot

be skipped.

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component

which you used for recording.

• Disc can be neither played back nor

ejected.

• Unlock the disc (see page 10).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Check the cords and connections.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in

the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,

Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

the file names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not

add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

• A longer readout time is required

(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the

display).

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are

you have intended them to play.

recorded.

• Elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused

by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.

• “NO FILES” appears on the display.

Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• Correct characters are not displayed

(e.g. album name).

This unit can only display letters (upper case),

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

• “NO MAG” appears on the display.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Insert a disc into the magazine.

Insert the magazine.

Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly

and press the reset button of the CD changer.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

Press the reset button of the CD changer.

• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).

• “CALL 1-888-539-SIRIUS TO

SUBSCRIBE” scrolls on the display

while listening to the SIRIUS Satellite

radio.

Starts subscribing SIRIUS Satellite radio (see page

15).

• No sound can be heard.

“UPDATING” appears on the

display.

The unit is updating the channel information and

it takes a few minutes to complete.

• Either “NO SIGNAL” scrolls or

“NO SIGNL” appears on the display.

Move to an area where signals are stronger.

Connect the antenna firmly.

• Either “NO ANTENNA” scrolls or

“ANTENNA” appears on the display.

• “NO CH” appears on the display for

about 5 seconds, then returns to the

previous display while listening to

the SIRIUS Satellite radio.

No broadcast on the selected channel.

Select another channel or continue listening to the

previous channel.

No text information for the selected channel.

• “NO (information)*” scrolls on the

display while listening to the SIRIUS

Satellite radio.

• “---” appears on the display while

listening to the XM Satellite radio.

* NO CATEGORY, NO ARTIST, NO COMPOSER, and NO SONG/PROGRAM

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• “---” appears on the display for

about 2 seconds, then returns to the

previous channel while listening to

the XM Satellite radio.

Selected channel is no longer available or is

unauthorized.

Select another channel or continue listening to the

previous channel.

• “OFF AIR” appears on the display

while listening to the XM Satellite

radio.

Selected channel is not broadcasting at this time.

Select another channel or continue listening to the

previous channel.

• “LOADING” appears on the display

while listening to the XM Satellite

radio.

The unit is loading the channel information

and audio. Text information are temporarily

unavailable.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

• Satellite radio does not work at all.

Reconnect this unit and the satellite radio

correctly, then reset the unit.

• The iPod or D. player does not turn

on or does not work.

• Check the connecting cable and its connection.

• Update the firmware version.

•

Change the battery.

• Buttons do not work as intended.

• The sound is distorted.

The functions of the buttons have been changed.

Press MODE before performing the operation.

Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the

iPod/D. player.

• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.

the display.

• Playback stops.

The headphones are disconnected during

playback. Restart the playback operation using the

control panel (see page 18).

• No sound can be heard when

connecting an iPod nano.

Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.

• No sound can be heard.

• “ERROR 01” appears on the display

when connecting a D. player.

Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,

connect it again.

• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”

appears on the display.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or

D. player.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and

iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Check the connection between the adapter and

this unit.

• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.

not work after disconnecting from

this unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

CD PLAYER SECTION

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical

pickup (semiconductor laser)

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Power Output:

18 W RMS × 4 Channels at

4 Ω and ≤ 1% THD+N

Signal to Noise Ratio:

80 dBA (reference: 1 W into 4 Ω)

Dynamic Range:

96 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit

MP3 Decoding Format:

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Tone Control Range:

Bass:

10 dB at 100 Hz

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

2.5 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ

WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding

Format:

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

2.0 V /20 kΩ load (full scale)

Other Terminal: CD changer

GENERAL

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System: Negative ground

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)

Dimensions (W × H × D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm

(7-3/16" × 2-1/16" × 5-15/16")

Panel Size (approx.):

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM: 87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz

(with channel interval set to 100 kHz

or 200 kHz)

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

(with channel interval set to 50 kHz)

AM: 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz

(with channel interval set to 10 kHz)

531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm

(7-7/16" × 2-5/16" × 7/16")

Mass (approx.):

(with channel interval set to 9 kHz)

1.4 kg (3.1 lbs) (excluding accessories)

[FM Tuner]

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

Design and specifications are subject to change

without notice.

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 35 dB

If a kit is necessary for your car, consult your

telephone directory for the nearest car audio

speciality shop.

Capture Ratio: 1.5 dB

[AM Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 μV

Selectivity: 35 dB

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Still having trouble??

USA ONLY

Call 1-800-252-5722

http://www.jvc.com

We can help you!

EN, SP, FR

1105DTSMDTJEIN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KD-AR370/KD-G320

Installation/Connection Manual

Manual de instalación/conexión

Manuel d’installation/raccordement

GET0349-002A

[J]

1105DTSMDTJEIN

EN, SP,FR

ENGLISH

ESPAÑOL

FRANÇAIS

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground

electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a

voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio este sistema, será necesario un inversor de tensión, que puede ser

Esta unidad está diseñada para funcionar con 12 V de CC, con

sistemas eléctricos de masa NEGATIVA. Si su vehículo no posee

Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant

continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE. Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce

type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous

pouvez acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.

dealers.

adquirido en los concesionarios de JVC de equipos de audio para

automóviles.

WARNINGS

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the

battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before

installing the unit.

ADVERTENCIAS

AVERTISSEMENTS

Para evitar cortocircuitos, recomendamos que desconecte el terminal Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher

negativo de la batería y que efectúe todas las conexiones eléctricas

antes de instalar la unidad.

la borne négative de la batterie et d’effectuer tous les raccordements

électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after

installation.

• Asegúrese de volver a conectar a masa esta unidad al chasis

del automóvil después de la instalación.

• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de

cet appareil au châssis de la voiture après l’installation.

Notes:

Notas:

Remarques:

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows

frequently, consult your JVC car audio dealer.

• Reemplace el fusible por uno con la corriente especificada. Si el

fusible se quemase frecuentemente consulte con su concesionario

de JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.

• Se recomienda conectar los altavoces con una potencia máxima

de más de 50 W (tanto atrás como adelante, con una impedancia

de 4 Ω a 8 Ω). Si la potencia máxima es de menos de 50 W, cambie

“AMP GAIN” para evitar daños en los altavoces (consulte la página 14

del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES).

• Para evitar cortocircuitos, cubra los cables NO UTILIZADOS con cinta

aislante.

• El sumidero térmico estará muy caliente después del uso. Asegúrese

de no tocarlo al desmontar esta unidad.

• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute

souvent, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC.

• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de

plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière et les enceintes avant, avec une

impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est

inférieure à 50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager

vos enceintes (voir page 14 du MANUAL D’INSTRUCTIONS).

• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont

PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande isolante.

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum

power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an

impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,

change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being

damaged (see page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads

with insulating tape.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it

when removing this unit.

• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire

attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet appareil.

Heat sink

Sumidero térmico

Dissipateur de chaleur

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker

connections:

PRECAUCIONES sobre las conexiones de la

fuente de alimentación y de los altavoces:

PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la

connexion des enceintes:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • NO conecte los conductores de altavoz del cable de

• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon

d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon, l’appareil serait

sérieusement endommagé.

• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation

aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des enceintes de votre voiture.

car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the

speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

alimentación a la batería de automóvil, pues podrían

producirse graves daños en la unidad.

• ANTES de conectar a los altavoces los conductores de altavoz del

cable de alimentación, verifique el conexionado de altavoz de su

automóvil.

Parts list for installation and connection

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Con esta unidad se suministran las siguientes piezas. Si hay algún

consult your JVC car audio dealer immediately.

Lista de piezas para instalación y conexión

Liste des pièces pour l’installation et

raccordement

Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose

elemento faltante, consulte inmediatamente con su concesionario de

JVC de equipos de audio para automóviles.

manquait, consultez votre revendeur autoradio JVC immédiatement.

A / B

Hard case/Control panel

Estuche duro/Panel de control

Etui de transport/Panneau de commande

Sleeve

Cubierta

Manchon

Trim plate

Placa de guarnición

Plaque d’assemblage

Power cord

Cordón de alimentación

Cordon d’alimentation

Washer (ø5)

Arandela (ø5)

Rondelle (ø5)

Lock nut (M5)

Tuerca de seguridad (M5)

Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)

Mounting bolt—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16")

Perno de montaje—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16 pulgada)

Boulon de montage—M5 × 20 mm (M5 × 13/16 pouces)

Rubber cushion

Cojín de goma

Amortisseur en

caoutchouc

Handles

Manijas

Poignées

Remote controller

Control remoto

Télécommade

Battery

Pila

Pile

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION

INSTALACION (MONTAJE EN EL

TABLERO DE INSTRUMENTOS)

INSTALLATION (MONTAGE

DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)

(IN-DASH MOUNTING)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any La siguiente ilustración muestra una instalación típica. Si tiene alguna

questions or require information regarding installation kits, consult

your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.

L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si

vous avez des questions ou avez besoin d’information sur des kits

pregunta o necesita información acerca de las herramientas para

instalación, consulte con su concesionario de JVC de equipos de audio d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed para automóviles o a una compañía que suministra tales herramientas. compagnie d’approvisionnement.

by a qualified technician.

• Si usted no está seguro de cómo instalar correctamente la unidad,

hágala instalar por un técnico cualificado.

• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le

faire installer par un technicien qualifié.

Do the required electrical connections.

Realice las conexiones eléctricas requeridas.

Réalisez les connexions électriques.

When you stand the unit,

be careful not to damage

the fuse on the rear.

Al poner la unidad vertical,

tenga cuidado de no dañar

el fusible provisto en la

parte posterior.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

Lorsque vous mettez

Doble las lengüetas apropiadas para

retener firmemente la manga en su lugar.

Tordez les languettes appropriées pour

maintenir le manchon en place.

l’appareil à la verticale,

faire attention de ne pas

endommager le fusible situé

sur l’arrière.

Removing the unit

Extracción de la unidad

Retrait de l’appareil

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Antes de extraer la unidad, libere la sección trasera.

Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

Inserte las dos manijas y, a continuación,

extráigalas de la manera indicada en la ilustración

para poder desmontar la unidad.

Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la façon

illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.

When using the optional stay / Cuando emplea un

soporte opcional / Lors de l’utilisation du hauban en

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Instalación de la unidad sin utilizar

la cubierta / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil scans utiliser de manchon

option

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

En un automóvil Toyota, por ejemplo, en primer lugar desmonte el autorradio e instale la unidad en su lugar.

Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.

Fire wall

Tabique a prueba de incendios

Cloison

Stay (option)

Soporte (opción)

Hauban (en option)

Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm

Not supplied for this unit.

No suministrado con esta unidad.

Non fourni avec cet appareil.

(M5 × 3/8")*²

Tornillos tipo plano—M5 × 8 mm

(M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*²

Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm

(M5 × 3/8 pouces)*²

Dashboard

Tablero de

instrumentos

Tableau de bord

Bracket*²

Ménsula*²

Support*²

Screw (option)

Tornillo (opción)

Vis (en option)

Flat type screws—M5 × 8 mm

(M5 × 3/8")*²

Tornillos tipo plano—M5 × 8 mm

Pocket

Compartimiento

Poche

(M5 × 3/8 pulgada)*²

Bracket*²

Ménsula*²

Support*²

Vis à tête plate—M5 × 8 mm

(M5 × 3/8 pouces)*²

Note

Nota

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm (3/8") -long screws. If longer

screws are used, they could damage the unit.

: Cuando instala la unidad en la ménsula de montaje, asegúrese de utilizar los tornillos de 8 mm (3/8 pulgada) de

longitud. Si se utilizan tornillos más largos, éstos pueden dañar la unidad.

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.

Instale la unidad a un ángulo de menos de 30˚.

Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30˚.

Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm

(3/8 pouces). Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.

TROUBLESHOOTING

• The fuse blows.

LOCALIZACION DE AVERIAS

• El fusible se quema.

EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES

• Le fusible saute.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

* ¿Están los conductores rojo y negro correctamente conectados?

* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?

• Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

• No es posible conectar la alimentación.

* ¿Está el cable amarillo conectado?

• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.

* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?

• No sound from the speakers.

• No sale sonido de los altavoces.

• Pas de son des enceintes.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz cortocircuitado?

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?

• Sound is distorted.

• El sonido presenta distorsión.

• Le son est déformé.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?

* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una

masa común?

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?

* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble

à la masse?

• Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using

shorter and thicker cords?

• Perturbación de ruido.

* ¿El terminal de tierra trasero está conectado al chasis del automóvil

utilizando los cordones más corto y más grueso?

• Interférence avec les sons.

* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la

voiture avec un cordon court et épais?

• Unit becomes hot.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• La unidad se calienta.

• L’appareil devient chaud.

* ¿Está el cable de salida del altavoz conectado a masa?

* ¿Están los terminales “–” de los altavoces L y R conectados a una

masa común?

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?

* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble

à la masse?

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

• Este receptor no funciona en absoluto.

• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.

* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?

* ¿Reinicializó el receptor?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENGLISH

ESPAÑOL

FRANÇAIS

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS

RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES

Typical connections / Conexiones tipicas / Raccordements typiques

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.

Antes de la conexión: Verifique atentamente el conexionado del

vehículo. Una conexión incorrecta podría producir daños graves en la

Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le

câblage du véhicule. Une connexion incorrecte peut endommager

sérieusement l’appareil.

Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car unidad.

body may be different in color.

Los cordones del cable de alimentación y los del conector procedentes Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de

de la carrocería del automóvil podrían ser de diferentes en color.

la voiture peuvent être différents en couleur.

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order

specified in the illustration below.

1 Conecte los conductores de color del cable de alimentación en el

1 Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre

orden especificado en la ilustración de abajo.

spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

2 Conecte el cable de antena.

3 Por último, conecte el cable de alimentación a la unidad.

2 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.

3 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.

To external components (see diagram

A los componentes externos (véase el diagrama

)

Aux appareils extérieurs (voir le diagramme

)

Rear ground terminal

Terminal de tierra

posterior

Borne arrière de

masse

15 A fuse

Fusible de 15 A

Fusible 15 A

Not supplied for this unit.

No suministrado con esta unidad.

Non fourni avec cet appareil.

Ignition switch

Interruptor de encendido

Interrupteur d’allumage

Black

Negro

Noir

Line out (see diagram

Salida de línea

)

Antenna terminal

Terminal de la antena

Borne de l’antenne

To metallic body or chassis of the car

A un cuerpo metálico o chasis del automóvil

Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture

(véase diagrama

Sortie de ligne

(voir le diagramme

)

Yellow*²

Amarillo*²

Jaune*²

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery

(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

A un terminal activo del bloque de fusibles conectado a la batería del

automóvil (desviando el interruptor de encendido) (12 V constantes)

A une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la

voiture (en dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)

Red

Rojo

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

A un terminal accesorio del bloque de fusibles

Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible

Rouge

Fuse block

Bloque de fusibles

Porte-fusible

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation,

this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be

turned on.

Antes de comprobar el funcionamiento de esta unidad previa

a de la instalación, es necesario conectar este cable, de lo

contrario no se podrá conectar la alimentación.

Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant

installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut

pas être mis sous tension.

Blue with white stripe

Azul con rayas blancas

Bleu avec bande blanche

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any (200 mA max.)

Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la antena automática, si hubiere (máx. 200 mA)

Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une

(200 mA max.)

Brown

Marrón

Marrone

To cellular phone system—only for KD-AR370

Al sistema de teléfono celular—sólo para KD-AR370

Al cellulare—seulement pour le KD-AR370

White with black stripe

Blanco con rayas negras

Blanc avec bande noire

White

Blanco

Blanc

Gray with black stripe

Gris con rayas negras

Gris avec bande noire

Gray

Gris

Green with black stripe

Verde con rayas negras

Vert avec bande noire

Green

Verde

Vert

Purple with black stripe

Púrpura con rayas negras

Violet avec bande noire

Purple

Púrpura

Violet

Left speaker (front)

Altavoz izquierdo (frontal)

Right speaker (front)

Altavoz derecho (frontal)

Left speaker (rear)

Altavoz izquierdo (trasero)

Right speaker (rear)

Altavoz derecho (trasero)

Enceinte gauche (avant)

Enceinte droit (avant)

Enceinte gauche (arrière)

Enceinte droit (arrière)

Connecting the external amplifiers and/or subwoofer Conexión de los amplificadores y/o subwoofer externos Connexion

d’amplificateurs extérieurs et/ou d’un caisson de grave

You can connect amplifiers to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote

lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through

this unit.

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the

amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.

Usted podrá conectar amplificadores para mejorar el sistema estéreo

de su automóvil.

Vous pouvez connecter des amplificateurs pour améliorer votre

système autoradio.

• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche)

au fil de commande à distance de l’autre appareil de façon qu’il

puisse être commandé via cet appareil.

• Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les

à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils d’enceintes de cet appareil

inutilisés.

•

Conecte el conductor remoto (azul con rayas blancas) al conductor

remoto del otro equipo para poderlo controlar a través de esta unidad.

• Desconecte los altavoces de esta unidad y conéctelos al

amplificador. Los cables de los altavoces de esta unidad

quedan sin usar.

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Conector en Y (no suministrado con esta unidad)

Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet appareil)

Remote lead

Cable remoto

Fil d’alimentation à distance

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic

body or to the chassis of the car—to the place

uncoated with paint (if coated with paint, remove

the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do

so may cause damage to the unit.

Fije firmemente el cable de tierra a la carrocería

metálica o al chasis—a un lugar no cubierto

con pintura (si está cubierto con pintura, quítela

antes de fijar el cable). De lo contrario, se podrían

producir daños en la unidad.

Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au

châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui

n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert

de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant

d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut être endommagé

si cela n’est pas fait correctement.

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

Cable remoto (Azul con rayas blancas)

Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)

Rear speakers

Altavoces posteriores

Enceintes arrière

To the remote lead of other equipment or

automatic antenna if any

Al conductor remoto de otro equipo o de la

antena automática, si hubiere

Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à

l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une

JVC Amplifier

Amplificador de JVC

JVC Amplificateur

Front speakers

Altavoces delanteros

Enceintes avant

Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

Ajuste “L/O MODE” a “REAR” (Consulte la página 14 del MANUAL DE

INSTRUCCIONES.)

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Cable de señal (no suministrado con esta unidad)

Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil)

Réglez “L/O MODE” sur “REAR” (Voir la page 14 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)

Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

Ajuste “L/O MODE” a “WOOFER” (Consulte la página 14 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.)

Réglez “L/O MODE” sur “WOOFER” (Voir la page 14 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)

Front speakers

Altavoces delanteros

Enceintes avant

JVC Amplifier

Amplificador de JVC

JVC Amplificateur

JVC Amplifier

Amplificador de JVC

JVC Amplificateur

Subwoofer

Caisson de grave

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C ^{Connecting the external components / Conexión de los componentes externos / Connexion des appareils extérieurs}

JVC CD changer, SIRIUS Satellite radio, XM Satellite radio, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / Cambiador de CD de JVC, radio satelital SIRIUS, radio satelital XM,

iPod® de Apple o reproductor JVC D. / Changeur de CD JVC, radio satellite SIRIUS, radio satellite XM, iPod® Apple ou lecteur D. JVC

• Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione “CHANGER” para el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la página14 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.) / Réglez “CHANGER” pour

le réglage de l’entrée extérieures (Voir page14 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)

You can connect these components in series as illustrated below.

• For listening to the SIRIUS Satellite radio, connect a JVC DLP

—Down Link Processor (separately purchased) to this unit.

• The iPod*⁵or D. player can be connected using an interface

adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for

D. player).

Vous pouvez connecter ces appareils en série comme montrée sur

l’illustration.

Estos componentes se pueden conectar en serie, tal como se muestra

en la ilustración de abajo.

•

Pour écouter la radio satellite SIRIUS, connectez un processeur DLP JVC

—Processeur de signaux satellite-terre (vendu séparément) à cet appareil.

• Para escuchar la radio satelital SIRIUS, conecte un DLP (Down Link

Processor) de JVC (adquirido por separado) al receptor.

• Puede conectar el iPod*⁵o el reproductor D. usando un adaptador

de interfaz (no suministrado)—KS-PD100 (para iPod) o KS-PD500

(para el reproductor D.).

• Le iPod*⁵ou le lecteur D. peut être connecté en utilisant un

adaptateur d’interface (non fourni)—KS-PD100 (pour iPod) ou

KS-PD500 (pour le lecteur D.).

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod (adquirido separadamente)

iPod Apple (vendu séparément)

Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Conexión 1 (conexión integrada) /Connexion 1 (connexion intégrée)

CD changer jack

Jack para el cambiador de CD

Prise du changeur CD

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

Reproductor D. JVC (adquirido

separadamente)

JVC DLP

DLP JVC

Processeur DLP JVC

JVC CD changer

Cambiador de CD de JVC

Changeur de CD JVC

Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)

• For listening to the XM Satellite radio, you can also connect XMDirect Universal Tuner Box (separately purchased) through this unit using JVC

Smart Digital Adapter—XMDJVC100 (not supplied).

• Para escuchar la radio satelital XM, también puede conectar el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™ (adquirido por separado) al receptor mediante un

adaptador Smart Digital XMDJVC100 de JVC (no suministrado).

• Pour écouter la radio satellite XM, vous pouvez aussi connecter le tuner universel XMDirect (vendu séparément) à cet appareil en utilisant l’adaptateur

numérique intelligent JVC—XMDJVC100 (non fourni).

Antenna (supplied with XMDirect Universal Tuner Box)

Antena (suministrada con el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™)

Antenne (fournie avec le tuner universel XMDirect

)

To CD changer, KS-PD100,

or KS-PD500

Al cambiador de CD,

KS-PD100 o KS-PD500

Au changeur de CD,

KS-PD100 ou KS-PD500

XMDirect Universal Tuner Box

Sintonizador universal XMDirect™

Tuner universel XMDirect

Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Conexión 2 (conexión alternativa) / Connexion 2 (connexion alternative)

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod (adquirido separadamente)

iPod Apple (vendu séparément)

CD changer jack

Jack para el cambiador de CD

Prise du changeur CD

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

Reproductor D. JVC (adquirido

separadamente)

JVC DLP

DLP JVC

Processeur DLP JVC

JVC CD changer

Cambiador de CD de JVC

Changeur de CD JVC

Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)

Antenna (supplied with XMDirect Universal Tuner Box)

Antena (suministrada con el Sintonizador universal XMDirect™)

Antenne (fournie avec le tuner universel XMDirect

)

XMDirect Universal Tuner Box

Sintonizador universal XMDirect™

Tuner universel XMDirect

CAUTION / PRECAUCION / PRECAUTION:

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

iPod es una marca comercial de Apple

Computer, Inc., registrada en los EE.UU. y

otros países.

iPod est une marque de commerce d’Apple

Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux États-Unis et

dans les autres pays.

• Before connecting the external components,

make sure that the unit is turned off.

• Antes de conectar los componentes

externos, asegúrese de que la unidad esté

apagada.

• Avant de connecter les appareils extérieurs,

assurez-vous que l’appareil est hors tension.

Signal cord supplied with your JVC

CD changer or DLP

Cable de señal suministrado con su

cambiador de CD o DLP JVC

Cordon de signal fourni avec votre

changeur de CD ou processeur DLP JVC

Signal cord supplied with your

Smart Digital Adapter

Cable de señal suministrado con el

adaptador Smart Digital

Cordon de signal fourni avec votre

adaptateur numérique intelligent

Audio signal cord supplied with your

Smart Digital Adapter

Cable de señal de audio suministrado

con el adaptador Smart Digital

Cordon audio fourni avec votre

adaptateur numérique intelligent

JVC PnP (Plug and Play) / PnP (“Plug and Play”) JVC / PnP (“Plug and Play”) JVC

• Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 14 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Seleccione “EXT IN” para el ajuste de entrada externa (Consulte la página14 del MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES.) / Réglez “EXT IN” pour le

réglage de l’entrée extérieure (Voir page 14 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)

Stereo mini plug

Miniclavija estéreo

Fiche stéré mini

To headphones jack

Al jack para auriculares

À la prise du casque d’écoute

You can also connect JVC PnP through this unit using JVC SIRIUS radio adapter,

KS-U100K (not supplied).

• Turning on/off the unit can also turns on/off the JVC PnP.

También podrá conectar la PnP JVC a través de este receptor utilizando el adaptador

para radio SIRIUS JVC, KS-U100K (no suministrado).

• Al encender/apagar el receptor también se enciende/apaga la PnP JVC.

Vous pouvez aussi connecter le PnP JVC à cet autoradio en utilisant l’adaptateur de

radio SIRIUS JVC KS-U100K (non fourni).

DC power plug

Clavija de alimentación de CC

Fiche d’alimentation CC

To DC IN jack

Al jack DC IN

À la prise DC IN

CD changer jack

Jack para el cambiador de CD

Prise du changeur CD

•

Mettre sous/hors tension l’autoradio peut aussi mettre sous/hors tension le PnP JVC.

Other external component / Otro componente externo / Autre appareil extérieur

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Cable de señal (no suministrado con esta unidad)

Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet appareil)

Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

Adaptador de entrada de línea KS-U57 (no suministrado

con esta unidad)

Adaptateur d’entrée de ligne KS-U57 (non fourni avec

cet appareil)

External component

Componente exterior

Appareil extérieur

CD changer jack

Jack para el cambiador de CD

External component

Componente exterior

Appareil extérieur

¹⁰AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this

Prise du changeur CD

unit)

¹⁰Adaptador de entrada AUX KS-U58 (no suministrado

con esta unidad)

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

Miniclavija estéreo de 3,5 mm

Mini fiche stéréo de 3,5 mm

¹⁰Adaptateur d’entrée AUX KS-U58 (non fourni avec cet

autoradio)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD RECEIVER

RECEPTEUR CD

KD-G421

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 5.

Pour annuler la démonstration des affichages, référez-vous à la page 5.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

Pour l’installation et les raccordements, se référer au manuel séparé.

INSTRUCTIONS

MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS

GET0352-003A

[EX/EU]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to

obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave

all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.

Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit

How to use the MODE button

If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions

mode, then the number buttons and 5/∞

buttons work as different function buttons.

Ex.: When number button 2 works as

MO (monaural) button.

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

Time countdown indicator

To use these buttons for their original

functions again after pressing MODE, wait for

5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons

until the functions mode is cleared or press

MODE again.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

How to detach/attach the control panel

Detaching...

Attaching...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to read this manual

• Button operations are mainly explained with

the illustrations in the table below.

CONTENTS

• Some related tips and notes are explained in

“More about this unit” (see pages 21 – 23).

Control panel ...................................

Getting started.................................

Basic operations....................................................

Press briefly.

Radio operations ..............................

FM RDS operations............................

Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme ...

Press repeatedly.

Disc operations.................................

Playing a disc in the unit .......................................

Playing discs in the CD changer.............................

Press either

one.

Sound adjustments........................... 12

General settings — PSM ................... 13

DAB tuner operations........................ 16

iPod®/D. player operations ................ 17

Other external component operations... 19

Remote controller — ^RM-RK60............. 20

More about this unit ......................... 21

Maintenance .................................... 24

Troubleshooting............................... 24

Specifications................................... 27

Press and hold until your

desired response begins.

Press and hold both

buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations.

: Indicator displayed for the

corresponding operation.

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving,

be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be

involved in a traffic accident.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as

this will block outside sounds, making driving

dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any

complicated operations.

Note: Only for [EX] model users in UK and

European countries

For security reasons, a numbered ID card

is provided with this unit, and the same ID

number is imprinted on the unit’s chassis.

Keep the card in a safe place, as it will help the

authorities to identify your unit if stolen.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot

or cold weather, wait until the temperature in

the car becomes normal before operating the

unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control panel

Parts identification

Display window

(standby/on attenuator) button

i MODE button

2 5 (up) / ∞ (down) and 4 /¢

buttons

3 Remote sensor

o DISP (display) button

;

(control panel release) button

Display window

• You can control this unit with an

optionally purchased remote controller. For

details, see page 20.

• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to

strong light (direct sunlight or artificial

lighting).

a Disc type indicators—WMA, MP3

s Playback source indicators—

CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is selected

as the playback source.

DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player.

d Playback mode / item indicators—

RND (random),

RPT (repeat)

f LOUD (loudness) indicator

g EQ (equalizer) indicator

4 Loading slot

5 Display window

(disc),

(folder),

6 0 (eject) button

7 T/P (traffic programme/programme type)

button

8 SRC (source) button

9 BAND button

p Control dial

q SEL (select) button

w EQ (equalizer) button

e MO (monaural) button

r SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

button

h Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)

indicators—JAZZ, CLASSIC, HIP HOP

POPS, ROCK, USER

j Tr (track) indicator

k Disc information indicators—TAG (ID3

Tag),

(folder),

(track/file)

l Source display / Volume level indicator

/ Main display

t Number buttons

y RPT (repeat) button

u RND (random) button

z RDS indicators—TP, PTY, AF, REG

x Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),

MO (monaural)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 12 and 13.)

Getting started

Basic operations

To drop the volume in a

moment (ATT)

Turn on the power.

To restore the sound, press

it again.

To turn off the power

Basic settings

* You cannot select these sources if they

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages

13 – 15.

are not ready or not connected.

⁄

• For FM/AM tuner

•

For DAB tuner

1 Canceling the display

demonstrations

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”

2 Setting the clock

Adjust the volume.

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust

the hour.

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then

adjust the minute.

Volume level appears.

Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or

“12H” (hour).

Volume level indicator

3 Finish the procedure.

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared

with other sources. Lower the volume

before playing a disc to avoid damaging

the speakers by the sudden increase of the

output level.

To check the current clock

time when the power is

turned off

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to

receive

Radio operations

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be

lost.

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO

indicator goes off.

Selected band appears.

Start searching for a station.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential

Memory)

When a station is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you

want to store into.

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

2 Select a desired station frequency.

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when

automatic presetting is over.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically in the FM

band.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset

FM RDS operations

number 4 of the FM1 band.

What you can do with RDS

RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations

to send an additional signal along with their

regular programme signals.

By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the

following:

• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the

following)

• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY

Standby Receptions (see pages 8 and 14)

• Tracing the same programme automatically

—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 9)

• Programme Search (see page 14)

Preset number flashes for a while.

Searching for your favorite

FM RDS programme

Listening to a preset station

You can tune in to a station broadcasting your

favorite programme by searching for a PTY

code.

• To store your favorite programme types, see

page 8.

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you

want.

The last selected PTY code appears.

Select one of your favorite preset

programme types.

To check the current clock time while

listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station

• For FM RDS stations, see page 9.

Frequency Ô Clock

Select one of the PTY codes (see

page 9).

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Start searching for your favorite

programme.

Using the standby receptions

TA Standby Reception

TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch

temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA)

from any source other than AM.

The volume changes to the preset TA volume

level if the current level is lower than the preset

level (see page 14).

To activate TA Standby Reception

The TP (Traffic Programme)

indicator either lights up or

flashes.

If there is a station broadcasting a

programme of the same PTY code as you

have selected, that station is tuned in.

• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby

Reception is activated.

• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby

Reception is not yet activated. (This occurs

when you are listening to an FM station

without the RDS signals required for TA

Standby Reception.)

Storing your favorite programme

types

You can store six favorite programme types.

Preset programme types in the number buttons

(1 to 6):

To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to

another station providing these signals. The

TP indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.

1 Select a PTY code (see page 7).

To deactivate the TA Standby Reception

The TP indicator goes off.

2 Select the preset number (1 – 6) you

want to store into.

PTY Standby Reception

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to

switch temporarily to your favorite PTY

programme from any source other than AM.

To activate and select your favorite PTY code

for PTY Standby Reception, see page 14.

The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.

• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby

Reception is activated.

• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby

Reception is not yet activated.

To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in

to another station providing these signals. The

PTY indicator will stop flashing and remain

lit.

Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other

PTY codes into other preset numbers.

4 Finish the procedure.

To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception,

select “OFF” for the PTY code (see page 14).

The PTY indicator goes off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tracing the same programme—

Network-Tracking Reception

Disc operations

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you

change the source or eject the disc.

When driving in an area where FM reception

is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically

tunes in to another FM RDS station of the

same network, possibly broadcasting the same

programme with stronger signals (see the

illustration below).

When shipped from the factory, Network-

Tracking Reception is activated.

To change the Network-Tracking Reception

setting, see “AF-REG” on page 14.

To stop play and eject the

disc

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas

(01 – 05)

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.

* If you have changed the external input

setting to “EXT IN” (see page 15), you

cannot select the CD changer.

To check the current clock time while

listening to an FM RDS station

Station name (PS) = Station

Frequency = Programme type

(PTY) = Clock = (back to the

beginning)

Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 – 06:

For disc number from 07 – 12:

PTY codes

NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,

SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY

M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),

WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE

IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),

OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About MP3 and WMA discs

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly

MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and

“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded

in “folders.”

To select a number from 01 – 06:

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-

compatible CD changer with your unit.

• You can also connect other CH-X series CD

changers (except CH-X99 and CH-X100).

These units are not compatible with MP3

discs.

To select a number from 07 – 12:

• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD

changer.

• You cannot use the KD-MK series CD

changers with this unit.

• Disc text information recorded in the CD

Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text

compatible CD changer is connected.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA

discs, it is required that folders are assigned

with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their

folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

To select a particular track in a folder (for

MP3 or WMA discs):

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

To go to the next or previous folders (only for

MP3 or WMA discs)

For MP3 discs:

For WMA discs:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other main functions

Changing the display information

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks

within the same folder.

While playing an MP3 or a WMA ²disc

• When “TAG DISP” is set to

“TAG ON” (see page 15)

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track

whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

• When “TAG DISP” is set to

“TAG OFF”

Each time you press the button, you can

skip 10 tracks.

• After the last track, the first track will be

selected and vice versa.

: Elapsed playing time with the current

track number

: Clock with the current track number

If the current disc is an audio CD,

“NO NAME” appears.

Only for the built-in CD player.

If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag

information, folder name and file name

appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will

not light up.

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting the playback modes

Sound adjustments

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to

the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

You can use only one of the following playback

modes at a time.

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

Preset values

BAS

TRE

LOUD

(bass) (treble) (loudness)

Indication (For)

USER

(Flat sound)

OFF

Mode

Plays repeatedly

ROCK

(Rock or disco music)

TRK RPT

: The current track.

+03

+01

+04

+02

+01

–02

+01

FLDR RPT*¹: All tracks of the current

folder.

CLASSIC

(Classical music)

OFF

DISC RPT*²: All tracks of the current disc.

POPS

(Light music)

RPT OFF

: Cancels.

Random play

HIP HOP

(Funk or rap music)

JAZZ

(Jazz music)

+03

OFF

Mode

Plays at random

FLDR RND*¹: All tracks of the current

folder, then tracks of the next

folder and so on.

Adjusting the sound

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your

preference.

DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.

MAG RND*²: All tracks of the inserted

discs.

RND OFF : Cancels.

Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA

disc.

Only while playing discs in the CD

changer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General settings — PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)

items listed in the table that follows.

Ex.: When “TRE” is selected

2 Select a PSM item.

Indication [Range]

BAS*¹(bass)

Adjust the bass. [–06 to +06]

TRE*¹(treble)

Adjust the treble. [–06 to +06]

FAD*²(fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

[R06 to F06]

Ex.: When “DIMMER” is selected

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.

BAL (balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

[L06 to R06]

LOUD*¹(loudness)

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a

well-balanced sound at low volume level.

[LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the

other PSM items if necessary.

VOL (volume)

5 Finish the procedure.

Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*³]

When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,

the adjustment you have made is stored for

the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)

including “USER.”

If you are using a two-speaker system, set the

fader level to “00.”

Depending on the amplifier gain control

setting. (See page 15 for details.)

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indications

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DEMO

Display demonstration

DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated

automatically if no operation is done for about

20 seconds, [5].

DEMO OFF : Cancels.

0 – 23 (1 – 12), [5]

[Initial: 0 (0:00)]

CLOCK H

Hour adjustment

00 – 59, [5]

[Initial: 00 (0:00)]

CLOCK M

Minute adjustment

24H/12H

Time display mode

12H O 24H, [5]

[Initial: 24H]

CLK ADJ*¹

Clock adjustment

AUTO

OFF

: [Initial]; The built-in clock is automatically adjusted

using the CT (clock time) data in the RDS signal.

: Cancels.

AF-REG*¹

Alternative frequency/

regionalization reception

When the received signals from the current FM RDS station or DAB

service become weak...

: [Initial]; Switches to another station (or service)

(the programme may differ from the one currently

received), [9, 17].

• The AF indicator lights up.

: Switches to another station broadcasting the same

programme.

• The AF and REG indicators light up.

: Cancels (not selectable when “DAB AF” is set to

“AF ON”).

AF REG

OFF

PTY-STBY*¹

PTY standby

Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [8].

OFF [Initial] = PTY codes, [9] = (back to the beginning)

TA VOL*¹

[Initial: VOL 15]; VOL 00 — VOL 30 or 50*², [8, 21]

Traffic announcement

volume

P-SEARCH*¹

Programme search

: Using the AF data, the unit tunes in to another

frequency broadcasting the same programme as the

original preset RDS station is if the preset station

signals are not sufficient.

OFF

: [Initial]; Cancels.

Only for FM RDS stations.

Depends on the amplifier gain control.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indications

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DAB AF*³

AF ON

: [Initial]; Traces the programme among DAB services

Alternative frequency

reception

and FM RDS stations, [9, 17].

: Cancels.

AF OFF

DAB VOL*³

DAB volume adjustment

You can adjust the volume level (VOL –12 — VOL +12) of DAB

tuner to match the FM sound level and store it in memory.

[Initial: VOL 00]

DIMMER

Dimmer

OFF

: Dims the display illumination of this unit.

: [Initial]; Cancels.

TEL

MUTING 1/MUTING 2 : Select either one which mutes the sounds

Telephone muting

while using a cellular phone.

: [Initial]; Cancels.

OFF

SCROLL*⁴

Scroll

ONCE

AUTO

OFF

: [Initial]; Scrolls the disc information once.

: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).

: Cancels.

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display

regardless of the setting.

EXT IN*⁵

CHANGER : [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [9], an Apple iPod

External input

or a JVC D. player, [17].

: To use any other external component than the above,

EXT IN

[19].

TAG DISP

TAG ON

: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing

Tag display

MP3/WMA tracks, [11].

TAG OFF : Cancels.

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.

LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power

of the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from

being damaged.)

AMP GAIN

Amplifier gain control

HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50

IF BAND

Intermediate frequency

filter

AUTO

WIDE

: [Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce

interference noises between close stations. (Stereo

effect may be lost.)

: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations,

but sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo

effect will remain.

Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, or DISC.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

⁄

Select a service (either primary or

secondary) to listen to.

DAB tuner operations

What is DAB system?

Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) can deliver

digital quality sound without any annoying

interference and signal distortion. Furthermore,

it can carry text, pictures, and data. When

transmitting, DAB combines several

programmes (called “services”) to form one

“ensemble.” In addition, each “service”—called

“primary service”—can also be divided into its

components (called “secondary service”). A

typical ensemble has six or more programmes

(services) broadcast at the same time.

By connecting the DAB tuner, this unit can do

the following:

To tune in to an ensemble manually

Start searching for an ensemble, as in step ! on

the left column.

2 Select the desired ensemble frequencies.

• Tracing the same programme automatically

—Alternative Frequency Reception (see

“DAB AF” on page 15).

It is recommended to use DAB tuner

KT-DB1000 with your unit. If you have

another DAB tuner, consult your JVC

IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

• Refer also to the Instructions supplied for

your DAB tuner.

Storing DAB services in memory

You can preset six DAB services (primary) for

each band.

1 Select a service you want (see steps ~

to ⁄ on the left column).

2 Select the preset number (1 – 6) you

want to store into.

Start searching for an ensemble.

When an ensemble is received, searching

stops.

Preset number flashes for a while.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tuning in to a preset DAB service

iPod®/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod

or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

2 Select the preset DAB service

(primary) number (1 – 6) you want.

• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for

controlling an iPod.

• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for

controlling a D. player.

If the selected primary service has some

secondary services, pressing the same

button again will tune in to the secondary

services.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

with the interface adapter.

Tracing the same programme—

Alternative Frequency Reception

Caution:

You can keep listening to the same programme

by activating the Alternative Frequency

Reception.

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the

vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting

or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

• While receiving a DAB service:

When driving in an area where a service

cannot be received, this unit automatically

tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS

station, broadcasting the same programme.

• While receiving an FM RDS station:

When driving in an area where a DAB service

is broadcasting the same programme as the

FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit

automatically tunes in to the DAB service.

Preparations:

Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the

external input setting, see page 15.

When shipped from the factory, Alternative

Frequency Reception is activated.

To deactivate the Alternative Frequency

Reception, see page 14 and 15.

Playback starts automatically from

where it has been paused*¹or stopped*²

previously.

To change the display information while

tuning to an ensemble

Adjust the volume.

Service name = Ensemble name = Channel

number = Frequency = Clock = (back to the

beginning)

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Confirm the selection.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 12 and 13.)

• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or

D. player is deactivated.

To move back to the previous

menu, press 5.

• If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.

• If the selected item has another layer, you

will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3

until the desired track is played.

To pause*¹or

stop*²playback

To resume

playback, press it

again.

• Holding 4 /¢

can skip 10

items at a time.

To fast-forward or

reverse the track

The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

If no operations are done for about

–

5 seconds.

To go to the next

or previous tracks

–

When you confirm the selection of a track.

For iPod

For D. player

Selecting the playback modes

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

Now the 5/∞/ 4 /¢

buttons

ONE RPT

work as the menu selecting buttons*³.

Functions the same as “Repeat One” of

the iPod or “Repeat Mode One” for the

D. player.

2 Select the desired menu.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as “Repeat All” of the

iPod or “Repeat Mode All” for the D. player.

For iPod:

RPT OFF

PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS

Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the

beginning)

Cancels.

For D. player:

PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE

ÔTRACK Ô (back to the beginning)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Random play

Other external component

operations

You can connect an external component to

the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line

Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX

Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

ALBM RND*⁴

Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of

the iPod.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of the

iPod or “Random Play On” of the D. player.

For listening to the iPod or D. player, refer to

pages 17 – 19.

RND OFF

Cancels.

For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in

“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”

To check other information while listening to

an iPod or a D. player

If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 15

and select the external input (“EXT IN”).

Turn on the connected component

and start playing the source.

Adjust the volume.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 12 and 13.)

To check the clock time while listening to an

external component

EXT IN Ô Clock

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Main elements and features

Remote controller —

RM-RK60

This unit can be remotely controlled as

instructed here (with an optionally purchased

remote controller). We recommend that you

use remote controller RM-RK60 with your unit.

Installing the lithium coin battery

(CR2025)

(standby/on attenuator) button

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is

on.

Aim the remote controller directly at the

remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is

no obstacle in between.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 SRC (source) button

Warning:

• Do not install any battery other than

CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may

explode.

• Store the battery in a place where children

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,

cracking, or starting a fire:

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat

the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

– Do not leave the battery with other

metallic materials.

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or

similar tools.

• Selects the source.

3 R (reverse) / F (forward) buttons

• Searches for stations (or services) if

pressed briefly.

• Searches for ensembles if pressed and

held.

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if

pressed and held.

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

• While listening to an Apple iPod or a

JVC D. player (in menu selecting mode):

– Selects an item if pressed briefly.

(Then, press D (down) to confirm the

selection.)

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate

when throwing away or saving it.

– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and

held.

4 SOUND button

Caution:

• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom

equalizer).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 U (up) / D (down) buttons

• Changes the FM/AM/DAB bands with

U (up).

More about this unit

• Changes the preset stations with

D (down).

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA

discs.

• While playing an MP3 disc on an

MP3-compatible CD changer:

– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

– Changes the folder if pressed and held.

• While listening to an iPod or a D. player:

– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with

D (down).

– Enter the main menu with U (up).

(Now U/D/R/F work as the menu

selecting buttons.)*

Basic operations

Turning on the power

• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can

also turn on the power. If the source is ready,

playback also starts.

Turning off the power

• If you turn off the power while listening to a

disc, disc play will start from where playback

has been stopped previously, next time you

turn on the power.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

6 VOLUME – /+ buttons

• Adjusts the volume level.

• During SSM search...

– All previously stored stations are erased and

stations are stored newly.

* U (up)

D (down) : Confirms the selection.

: Returns to the previous menu.

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

– When SSM is over, the station stored in

No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the

previously preset station is erased when a new

station is stored in the same preset number.

The unit is equipped with the steering wheel

remote control function.

• See the Installation/Connection Manual

(separate volume) for connection.

FM RDS operations

• Network-Tracking Reception requires

two types of RDS signals—PI (Programme

Identification) and AF (Alternative

Frequency) to work correctly. Without

receiving these data correctly, Network-

Tracking Reception will not operate correctly.

• If a Traffic Announcement is received by

TA Standby Reception, the volume level

automatically changes to the preset level (TA

VOL) if the current level is lower than the

preset level.

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• When Alternative Frequency Reception

is activated (with AF selected), Network-

Tracking Reception is also activated

automatically. On the other hand, Network-

Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated

without deactivating Alternative Frequency

Reception. (See page 14.)

• This unit can play back multi-session discs;

however, unclosed sessions will be skipped

while playing.

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play

back on this unit because of their disc

characteristics, or for the following reasons:

– Discs are dirty or scratched.

• If you want to know more about RDS, visit

«http://www.rds.org.uk».

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens

inside the unit.

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are

written with “Packet Write” method.

– There are improper recording conditions

(missing data, etc.) or media conditions

(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time

since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than

that of regular CDs.

Disc operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does

not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital

Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-

DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may

not be recommended.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective

seal stuck to the surface.

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed

by an ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperatures or

high humidities may cause malfunctions or

damage to the unit.

General

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/

CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),

MP3 and WMA formats.

• When a disc had been loaded, selecting

“DISC” for the playback source starts disc

play.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>

(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums,

artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,

2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA

files.

Inserting a disc

• When a disc is inserted upside down, the disc

automatically ejects.

• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and

unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into

the loading slot.

• This unit can display only one-byte

characters. No other characters can be

correctly displayed.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

meeting the conditions below:

Playing a disc

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3

or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent

sounds.

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency:

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,

Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can play back only files of the same

type which are first detected if a disc includes

both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/

WMA files.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• The maximum number of characters for file/

folder names vary among the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo: up to 128 characters

General settings—PSM

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the

volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the

unit automatically changes the volume level to

“VOL 30.”

– Joliet: up to 64 characters

– Windows long file name: up to 128

characters

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR

(variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy

in elapsed time display, and do not show

the actual elapsed time. Especially, after

performing the search function, this

difference becomes noticeable.

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of

200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and

MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate

format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

DAB tuner operations

• Only primary DAB services can be presetted

even when you store a secondary service.

• A previously preset DAB service is erased

when a new DAB service is stored in the same

preset number.

iPod® or D. player operations

• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D. player is charged through this unit.

• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all

operations from the iPod or D. player are

disabled. Perform all operations from this

unit.

• The text information may not be displayed

correctly.

– Some characters such as accented letters

cannot be shown correctly on the display.

– Depends on the condition of

communication between the iPod or

D. player and the unit.

• If the text information includes more than

8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see

also page 15). This unit can display up to 40

characters.

– WMA files which are not based upon

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

Notice:

Changing the source

When operating an iPod or a D. player,

some operations may not be performed

correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the

following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

• If you change the source, playback also stops

(without ejecting the disc).

Next time you select “DISC” for the playback

source, disc play starts from where it has been

stopped previously.

Ejecting a disc

• If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted

again into the loading slot to protect it from

dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert

the disc around the center holder (with the

printed surface facing up).

Maintenance

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after

use.

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the

connectors.

To keep discs clean

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe

the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth

moistened with alcohol, being careful not to

damage the connectors.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it

with a soft cloth in a straight line

from center to edge.

• Do not use any solvent (for example,

conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,

benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

Connector

To play new discs

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the

CD player in the following cases:

• After starting the heater in the car.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the CD player may

malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and

leave the unit turned on for a few hours until

the moisture evaporates.

New discs may have some rough

spots around the inner and outer

edges. If such a disc is used, this

unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges

with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:

Warped disc

How to handle discs

When removing a disc from

its case, press down the center

holder of the case and lift the disc

out, holding it by the edges.

• Always hold the disc by the

Center holder

Sticker

Sticker residue

Stick-on label

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service

center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the

speakers.

• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

• The unit does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

Store stations manually.

• SSM automatic presetting does not

work.

• Static noise while listening to the

radio.

Connect the aerial firmly.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played

back.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot

be skipped.

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component

which you used for recording.

• Disc can be neither played back nor

ejected.

• Unlock the disc (see page 11).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Check the cords and connections.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in

the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,

Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

the file names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not

add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

• A longer readout time is required

(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the

display).

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.

• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are

you have intended them to play.

recorded.

• Elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused

by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.

• “NO FILES” appears on the display.

Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• Correct characters are not displayed

(e.g. album name).

This unit can only display letters (upper case),

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

• “NO MAG” appears on the display.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Insert a disc into the magazine.

Insert the magazine.

Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly

and press the reset button of the CD changer.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

Press the reset button of the CD changer.

• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• “noSIGNAL” appears on the display. Move to an area with stronger signals.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly

and reset the unit (see page 2).

• “ANTENANG” appears on the

display.

Check the cords and connections.

• The DAB tuner does not work at all. Reconnect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly

and reset the unit (see page 2).

• The iPod or D. player does not turn

on or does not work.

• Check the connecting cable and its connection.

• Update the firmware version.

•

Change the battery.

• Buttons do not work as intended.

• The sound is distorted.

The functions of the buttons have been changed.

Press MODE before performing the operation.

Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the

iPod/D. player.

• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.

the display.

• Playback stops.

The headphones are disconnected during

playback. Restart the playback operation using

the control panel (see page 18).

• No sound can be heard when

connecting an iPod nano.

Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.

• No sound can be heard.

• “ERROR 01” appears on the display

when connecting a D. player.

Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,

connect it again.

• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”

appears on the display.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or

D. player.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and

iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Check the connection between the adapter and

this unit.

• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.

not work after disconnecting from

this unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

CD PLAYER SECTION

Maximum Power Output:

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical

pickup (semiconductor laser)

Front: 50 W per channel

Rear: 50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz

to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%

total harmonic distortion.

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Dynamic Range:

96 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit

MP3 Decoding Format:

Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz

to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%

total harmonic distortion.

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Tone Control Range:

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding

Bass:

10 dB at 100 Hz

Format:

Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps

GENERAL

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System: Negative ground

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Dimensions (W × H × D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm

Panel Size (approx.):

Other Terminals:

CD changer, Steering wheel remote input

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM: (MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz

(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz

188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm

Mass (approx.):

[FM Tuner]

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

1.4 kg (excluding accessories)

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 30 dB

Design and specifications are subject to change

without notice.

Capture Ratio: 1.5 dB

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States

and/or other countries.

[MW Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 μV

Selectivity: 35 dB

• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

[LW Tuner]

Sensitivity: 50 μV

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Vous avez des PROBLÈMES de

fonctionnement?

Réinitialisez votre appareil

Référez-vous à la page intitulée Comment réinitialiser votre appareil

EN, FR

1105DTSMDTJEIN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KD-G421

Installation/Connection Manual

Manuel d’installation/raccordement

GET0352-010A

[EX/EU]

1105DTSMDTJEIN

EN, FR

ENGLISH

FRANÇAIS

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle

does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR

ENTERTAINMENT dealers.

Cet appareil est conçu pour fonctionner sur des sources de courant continu de 12 V à masse NEGATIVE.

Si votre véhicule n’offre pas ce type d’alimentation, il vous faut un convertisseur de tension, que vous pouvez

acheter chez un revendeur d’autoradios JVC.

WARNINGS

AVERTISSEMENTS

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all Pour éviter tout court-circuit, nous vous recommandons de débrancher la borne négative de la batterie et

electrical connections before installing the unit.

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.

d’effectuer tous les raccordements électriques avant d’installer l’appareil.

• Assurez-vous de raccorder de nouveau la mise à la masse de cet appareil au châssis de la

voiture après l’installation.

Notes:

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR Remarques:

ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

• Remplacer le fusible par un de la valeur précisée. Si le fusible saute souvent, consulter votre revendeur

d’autoradios JVC.

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at

the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than

50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 15 of the

INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

• Il est recommandé de connecter des enceintes avec une puissance de plus de 50 W (les enceintes arrière

et les enceintes avant, avec une impédance comprise entre 4 Ω et 8 Ω). Si la puissance maximum est

inférieure à 50 W, changez “AMP GAIN” pour éviter d’endommager vos enceintes (voir page 15 du

MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS).

• Pour éviter les court-circuits, couvrir les bornes des fils qui ne sont PAS UTILISÉS avec de la bande

isolante.

• Le dissipateur de chaleur devient très chaud après usage. Faire attention de ne pas le toucher en retirant cet

appareil.

Heat sink

Dissipateur de chaleur

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

PRECAUTIONS sur l’alimentation et la connexion des enceintes:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit

• NE CONNECTEZ PAS les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation à la batterie; sinon,

will be seriously damaged.

l’appareil serait sérieusement endommagé.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in

your car.

• AVANT de connecter les fils d’enceintes du cordon d’alimentation aux enceintes, vérifiez le câblage des

enceintes de votre voiture.

Parts list for installation and connection

Liste des pièces pour l’installation et raccordement

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR

ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.

Les pièces suivantes sont fournies avec cet appareil. Si quelque chose manquait, consultez votre revendeur

autoradio JVC immédiatement.

A / B

Hard case/Control panel

Etui de transport/Panneau

de commande

Sleeve

Manchon

Trim plate

Plaque d’assemblage

Power cord

Cordon d’alimentation

Washer (ø5)

Rondelle (ø5)

Lock nut (M5)

Ecrou d’arrêt (M5)

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)

Boulon de montage (M5 × 20 mm)

Rubber cushion

Amortisseur en caoutchouc

Handles

Poignées

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information

INSTALLATION (MONTAGE DANS LE TABLEAU DE BORD)

L’illustration suivante est un exemple d’installation typique. Si vous avez des questions ou avez besoin

regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying d’information sur des kits d’installation, consulter votre revendeur d’autoradios JVC ou une compagnie

kits.

d’approvisionnement.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

• Si l’on n’est pas sûr de pouvoir installer correctement cet appareil, le faire installer par un technicien

qualifié.

Do the required electrical connections.

Réalisez les connexions électriques.

When you stand the unit,

be careful not to damage the

fuse on the rear.

Lorsque vous mettez

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

Tordez les languettes appropriées

pour maintenir le manchon en place.

l’appareil à la verticale,

faire attention de ne pas

endommager le fusible situé

sur l’arrière.

Removing the unit

Retrait de l’appareil

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Avant de retirer l’appareil, libérer la section arrière.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

Insérez les deux poignées, puis tirez de la

façon illustrée de façon à retirer l’appareil.

When using the optional stay / Lors de l’utilisation du

hauban en option

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Lors de l’installation de l’appareil

scans utiliser de manchon

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

Dans une voiture Toyota, par exemple, retirez d’abord l’autoradio et installez l’appareil à sa place.

Fire wall

Cloison

Stay (option)

Hauban (en option)

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

*²Not supplied for this unit.

Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*²

*²Non fourni avec cet autoradio.

Dashboard

Tableau de bord

Bracket*²

Support*²

Screw (option)

Vis (en option)

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Vis à tête plate (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Pocket

Poche

Bracket*²

Support*²

Note

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.

Installez l’appareil avec un angle de moins de 30˚.

used, they could damage the unit.

Remarque : Lors de l’installation de l’appareil sur le support de montage, s’assurer d’utiliser des vis d’une longueur de 8 mm.

Si des vis plus longues sont utilisées, elles peuvent endommager l’appareil.

TROUBLESHOOTING

• The fuse blows.

EN CAS DE DIFFICULTES

• Le fusible saute.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

* Les fils rouge et noir sont-ils racordés correctement?

• Power cannot be turned on.

• L’appareil ne peut pas être mise sous tension.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

* Le fil jaune est-elle raccordée?

• No sound from the speakers.

• Pas de son des enceintes.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il court-circuité?

• Sound is distorted.

• Le son est déformé.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?

* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?

• Noise interfere with sounds.

• Interférence avec les sons.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

* La prise arrière de mise à la terre est-elle connectée au châssis de la voiture avec un cordon court et épais?

• This unit becomes hot.

• L’appareil devient chaud.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* Le fil de sortie d’enceinte est-il à la masse?

* Les bornes “–” des enceintes gauche et droit sont-elles mises ensemble à la masse?

• This unit does not work at all.

• Cet appareil ne fonctionne pas du tout.

* Have you reset your unit?

* Avez-vous réinitialisé votre appareil?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FRANÇAIS

ENGLISH

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

RACCORDEMENTS ELECTRIQUES

If your car is equipped with the ISO connector / For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Pour certaine voiture VW/Audi ou Opel

Si votre voiture est équippée d’un connecteur (Vauxhall)

ISO

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.

• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.

Vous aurrez peut-être besoin de modifier le câblage du cordon d’alimentation fourni comme montré sur l’illustration.

• Contactez votre revendeur automobile autorisé avant d’installer l’appareil.

• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.

• Connectez les connecteurs ISO comme montré sur l’illustration.

Original wiring / Câblage original

Modified wiring 1 / Câblage modifié 1

From the car body

De la carrosserie de la voiture

ISO connector

Connecteur ISO

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.

ISO connector of the supplied power cord

Connecteur ISO pour le cordon d’alimentation

fourni

Utilisez le câblage modifié 2 si l’appareil ne se met pas sous tension.

Modified wiring 2 / Câblage modifié 2

View from the lead side

Vue à partir du côté des fils

Y: Yellow

R: Red

Rouge

Jaune

Connections without using the ISO connectors / Connexions sans l’utilisation des connecteurs ISO

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause

serious damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

Avant de commencer la connexion: Vérifiez attentivement le câblage du véhicule. Une connexion

incorrecte peut endommager sérieusement l’appareil.

Le fil du cordon d’alimentation et ceux des connecteurs du châssis de la voiture peuvent être différents en

couleur.

1 Cut the ISO connector.

2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

3 Connect the aerial cord.

1 Coupez le connecteur ISO.

Connectez les fils colorés du cordon d’alimentation dans l’ordre spécifié sur l’illustration ci-dessous.

3 Connectez le cordon d’antenne.

4 Finalement, connectez le faisceau de fils à l’appareil.

4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram

Pour la télécommande de volant (voir le diagramme

)

To external components (see diagram

Aux appareils extérieurs (voir le diagramme

)

Rear ground

terminal

Borne arrière

de masse

15 A fuse

Fusible 15 A

Ignition switch

Interrupteur d’allumage

Not supplied for this unit.

Non fourni avec cet autoradio.

Line out (see diagram

Sortie de ligne

(voir le diagramme

)

Aerial terminal

Borne de l’antenne

)

Black

Noir

To metallic body or chassis of the car

Vers corps métallique ou châssis de la voiture

Yellow*²

Jaune*²

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the

ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

À une borne sous tension du porte-fusible connectée à la batterie de la voiture (en

dérivant l’interrupteur d’allumage) (12 V constant)

Fuse block

Porte-fusible

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to

installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power

cannot be turned on.

Pour vérifier le fonctionnement de cet appareil avant

installation, ce fil doit être raccordé, sinon l’appareil ne peut

pas être mis sous tension.

Red

Rouge

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

Vers borne accessoire du porte-fusible

Blue with white stripe

Bleu avec bande blanche

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)

Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne automatique s’il y en a une

(200 mA max.)

Brown

Marron

To cellular phone system

À un système de téléphone cellulaire

Gray

Gris

Green with black stripe

Vert avec bande noire

Green

Vert

Purple with black stripe

Violet avec bande noire

White with black stripe

Blanc avec bande noire

White

Blanc

Gray with black stripe

Gris avec bande noire

Purple

Violet

Left speaker (front)

Enceinte gauche (avant)

Right speaker (front)

Enceinte droit (avant)

Left speaker (rear)

Enceinte gauche (arrière)

Right speaker (rear)

Enceinte droit (arrière)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting the external amplifier / Connexion d’un amplificateur extérieur

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it

can be controlled through this unit.

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker

leads of this unit unused.

Vous pouvez connecter un amplificateur pour améliorer votre système autoradio.

• Connectez le fil de commande à distance (bleu avec bande blanche) au fil de commande à distance de

l’autre appareil de façon qu’il puisse être commandé via cet appareil.

• Déconnectez les enceintes de cet appareil et connectez-les à l’amplificateur. Laissez les fils

d’enceintes de cet appareil inutilisés.

Remote lead

Fil d’alimentation à distance

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Connecteur Y (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

Rear speakers

Enceintes arrière

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any

Au fil de télécommande de l’autre appareil ou à l’antenne

automatique s’il y en a une

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

Fil d’alimentation à distance (Bleu avec bande blanche)

JVC Amplifier

JVC Amplificateur

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body

or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated

with paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint

before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may

cause damage to the unit.

Attachez solidement le fil de mise à la masse au

châssis métallique de la voiture—à un endroit qui

n’est pas recouvert de peinture (s’il est recouvert

de peinture, enlevez d’abord la peinture avant

d’attacher le fil). L’appareil peut être endommagé si

cela n’est pas fait correctement.

Rear speakers

Enceintes arrière

Front speakers

(see diagram

)

Enceintes avant

(voir le diagramme

)

Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO

connector and connect them to the amplifier.

Coupez les fils des enceintes arrière du

connecteur ISO de la voiture et connectez-les à

l’amplificateur.

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Cordon de signal (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

Connecting the external components / Connexion des appareils extérieurs

CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / Changeur de CD, tuner DAB, iPod Apple® ou lecteur D. JVC

• Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) Choisissez “CHANGER” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieure (Voir page 15 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)

You can connect these components in series as illustrated below. The iPod*⁶or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

Vous pouvez connecter ces appareils en série comme montrée sur l’illustration. Le iPod*⁶ou le lecteur D. peut être connecté en utilisant un adaptateur d’interface (non fourni)—KS-PD100 (pour iPod) ou KS-PD500

(pour le lecteur D.).

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

iPod Apple (vendu séparément)

Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Connexion 1 (connexion intégrée)

CAUTION / PRECAUTION:

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)

• Before connecting the external

components, make sure that the unit

JVC CD changer

Changeur CD JVC

JVC DAB tuner

Tuner DAB JVC

is turned off.

• Avant de connecter les appareils

extérieurs, assurez-vous que l’appareil

est hors tension.

CD changer jack

Prise du changeur de CD

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer,

Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

iPod est une marque de commerce

d’Apple Computer, Inc., enregistrée aux

États-Unis et dans les autres pays.

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

iPod Apple (vendu séparément)

Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Connexion 2 (connexion alternative)

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

Connecting cord supplied for your CD

changer or DAB tuner

Cordon de connexion fourni avec votre

changeur CD ou tuner DAB

Lecteur D. JVC (vendu séparément)

JVC CD changer

Changeur CD JVC

JVC DAB tuner

Tuner DAB JVC

CD changer jack

Prise du changeur de CD

Other external component / Autre appareil extérieur

• Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

Choisissez “EXT IN” pour le réglage de l’entrée extérieure (Voir page 15 du MANUEL D’INSTRUCTIONS.)

External component

Appareil extérieur

CD changer jack

Prise du changeur de CD

Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

Adaptateur d’entrée de ligne KS-U57 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

External component

Appareil extérieur

AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

Adaptateur d’entrée AUX KS-U58 (non fourni avec cet autoradio)

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

Mini fiche stéréo de 3,5 mm

Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Connexion de la télécommande de volant

OE remote adapter (not supplied)

Adaptateur pour télécommande au volant (non fourni)

If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the

controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required.

Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.

Steering wheel remote input

Entrée de la télécommande de volant

Si votre voiture est munie d’une télécommande de volant, vous pouvez commander cet autoradio en

utilisant la télécommande. Pour le faire, un adaptateur pour télécommande au volant JVC (non fourni)

correspondant à votre voiture est nécessaire. Consultez votre revendeur d’autoradio JVC pour les détails.

Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)

Télécommande de volant (installée dans la voiture)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD RECEIVER

CD-RECEIVER

РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ

KD-G421

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 5.

Zum Abbrechen der Displaydemonstration siehe Seite 5.

Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 5.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

Für den Einbau und die Anschlüsse siehe das eigenständige Handbuch.

Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.

INSTRUCTIONS

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG

ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

GET0352-006A

[EY]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to

obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave

all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.

Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit

How to use the MODE button

If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions

mode, then the number buttons and 5/∞

buttons work as different function buttons.

Ex.: When number button 2 works as

MO (monaural) button.

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

Time countdown indicator

To use these buttons for their original

functions again after pressing MODE, wait for

5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons

until the functions mode is cleared or press

MODE again.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

How to detach/attach the control panel

Detaching...

Attaching...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to read this manual

• Button operations are mainly explained with

the illustrations in the table below.

CONTENTS

• Some related tips and notes are explained in

“More about this unit” (see pages 21 – 23).

Control panel ...................................

Getting started.................................

Basic operations....................................................

Press briefly.

Radio operations ..............................

FM RDS operations............................

Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme ...

Press repeatedly.

Disc operations.................................

Playing a disc in the unit .......................................

Playing discs in the CD changer.............................

Press either

one.

Sound adjustments........................... 12

General settings — PSM ................... 13

DAB tuner operations........................ 16

iPod®/D. player operations ................ 17

Other external component operations... 19

Remote controller — ^RM-RK60............. 20

More about this unit ......................... 21

Maintenance .................................... 24

Troubleshooting............................... 24

Specifications................................... 27

Press and hold until your

desired response begins.

Press and hold both

buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations.

: Indicator displayed for the

corresponding operation.

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving,

be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be

involved in a traffic accident.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as

this will block outside sounds, making driving

dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any

complicated operations.

For security reasons, a numbered ID card

is provided with this unit, and the same ID

number is imprinted on the unit’s chassis.

Keep the card in a safe place, as it will help the

authorities to identify your unit if stolen.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot

or cold weather, wait until the temperature in

the car becomes normal before operating the

unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control panel

Parts identification

Display window

(standby/on attenuator) button

i MODE button

2 5 (up) / ∞ (down) and 4 /¢

buttons

3 Remote sensor

o DISP (display) button

;

(control panel release) button

Display window

• You can control this unit with an

optionally purchased remote controller. For

details, see page 20.

• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to

strong light (direct sunlight or artificial

lighting).

a Disc type indicators—WMA, MP3

s Playback source indicators—

CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is selected

as the playback source.

DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player.

d Playback mode / item indicators—

RND (random),

RPT (repeat)

f LOUD (loudness) indicator

g EQ (equalizer) indicator

4 Loading slot

5 Display window

(disc),

(folder),

6 0 (eject) button

7 T/P (traffic programme/programme type)

button

8 SRC (source) button

9 BAND button

p Control dial

q SEL (select) button

w EQ (equalizer) button

e MO (monaural) button

r SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

button

h Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)

indicators—JAZZ, CLASSIC, HIP HOP

POPS, ROCK, USER

j Tr (track) indicator

k Disc information indicators—TAG (ID3

Tag),

(folder),

(track/file)

l Source display / Volume level indicator

/ Main display

t Number buttons

y RPT (repeat) button

u RND (random) button

z RDS indicators—TP, PTY, AF, REG

x Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),

MO (monaural)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 12 and 13.)

Getting started

Basic operations

To drop the volume in a

moment (ATT)

Turn on the power.

To restore the sound, press

it again.

To turn off the power

Basic settings

* You cannot select these sources if they

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages

13 – 15.

are not ready or not connected.

⁄

• For FM/AM tuner

•

For DAB tuner

1 Canceling the display

demonstrations

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”

2 Setting the clock

Adjust the volume.

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust

the hour.

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then

adjust the minute.

Volume level appears.

Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or

“12H” (hour).

Volume level indicator

3 Finish the procedure.

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared

with other sources. Lower the volume

before playing a disc to avoid damaging

the speakers by the sudden increase of the

output level.

To check the current clock

time when the power is

turned off

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to

receive

Radio operations

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be

lost.

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO

indicator goes off.

Selected band appears.

Start searching for a station.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential

Memory)

When a station is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you

want to store into.

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

2 Select a desired station frequency.

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when

automatic presetting is over.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically in the FM

band.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset

FM RDS operations

number 4 of the FM1 band.

What you can do with RDS

RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations

to send an additional signal along with their

regular programme signals.

By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the

following:

• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the

following)

• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY

Standby Receptions (see pages 8 and 14)

• Tracing the same programme automatically

—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 9)

• Programme Search (see page 14)

Preset number flashes for a while.

Searching for your favorite

FM RDS programme

Listening to a preset station

You can tune in to a station broadcasting your

favorite programme by searching for a PTY

code.

• To store your favorite programme types, see

page 8.

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you

want.

The last selected PTY code appears.

Select one of your favorite preset

programme types.

To check the current clock time while

listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station

• For FM RDS stations, see page 9.

Frequency Ô Clock

Select one of the PTY codes (see

page 9).

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Start searching for your favorite

programme.

Using the standby receptions

TA Standby Reception

TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch

temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA)

from any source other than AM.

The volume changes to the preset TA volume

level if the current level is lower than the preset

level (see page 14).

To activate TA Standby Reception

The TP (Traffic Programme)

indicator either lights up or

flashes.

If there is a station broadcasting a

programme of the same PTY code as you

have selected, that station is tuned in.

• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby

Reception is activated.

• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby

Reception is not yet activated. (This occurs

when you are listening to an FM station

without the RDS signals required for TA

Standby Reception.)

Storing your favorite programme

types

You can store six favorite programme types.

Preset programme types in the number buttons

(1 to 6):

To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to

another station providing these signals. The

TP indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.

1 Select a PTY code (see page 7).

To deactivate the TA Standby Reception

The TP indicator goes off.

2 Select the preset number (1 – 6) you

want to store into.

PTY Standby Reception

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to

switch temporarily to your favorite PTY

programme from any source other than AM.

To activate and select your favorite PTY code

for PTY Standby Reception, see page 14.

The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.

• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby

Reception is activated.

• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby

Reception is not yet activated.

To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in

to another station providing these signals. The

PTY indicator will stop flashing and remain

lit.

Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other

PTY codes into other preset numbers.

4 Finish the procedure.

To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception,

select “OFF” for the PTY code (see page 14).

The PTY indicator goes off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tracing the same programme—

Network-Tracking Reception

Disc operations

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you

change the source or eject the disc.

When driving in an area where FM reception

is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically

tunes in to another FM RDS station of the

same network, possibly broadcasting the same

programme with stronger signals (see the

illustration below).

When shipped from the factory, Network-

Tracking Reception is activated.

To change the Network-Tracking Reception

setting, see “AF-REG” on page 14.

To stop play and eject the

disc

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas

(01 – 05)

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.

* If you have changed the external input

setting to “EXT IN” (see page 15), you

cannot select the CD changer.

To check the current clock time while

listening to an FM RDS station

Station name (PS) = Station

Frequency = Programme type

(PTY) = Clock = (back to the

beginning)

Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 – 06:

For disc number from 07 – 12:

PTY codes

NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,

SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY

M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),

WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE

IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),

OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About MP3 and WMA discs

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly

MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and

“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded

in “folders.”

To select a number from 01 – 06:

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-

compatible CD changer with your unit.

• You can also connect other CH-X series CD

changers (except CH-X99 and CH-X100).

These units are not compatible with MP3

discs.

To select a number from 07 – 12:

• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD

changer.

• You cannot use the KD-MK series CD

changers with this unit.

• Disc text information recorded in the CD

Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text

compatible CD changer is connected.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA

discs, it is required that folders are assigned

with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their

folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

To select a particular track in a folder (for

MP3 or WMA discs):

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

To go to the next or previous folders (only for

MP3 or WMA discs)

For MP3 discs:

For WMA discs:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other main functions

Changing the display information

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks

within the same folder.

While playing an MP3 or a WMA ²disc

• When “TAG DISP” is set to

“TAG ON” (see page 15)

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track

whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

• When “TAG DISP” is set to

“TAG OFF”

Each time you press the button, you can

skip 10 tracks.

• After the last track, the first track will be

selected and vice versa.

: Elapsed playing time with the current

track number

: Clock with the current track number

If the current disc is an audio CD,

“NO NAME” appears.

Only for the built-in CD player.

If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag

information, folder name and file name

appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will

not light up.

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting the playback modes

Sound adjustments

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to

the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

You can use only one of the following playback

modes at a time.

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

Preset values

BAS

TRE

LOUD

(bass) (treble) (loudness)

Indication (For)

USER

(Flat sound)

OFF

Mode

Plays repeatedly

ROCK

(Rock or disco music)

TRK RPT

: The current track.

+03

+01

+04

+02

+01

–02

+01

FLDR RPT*¹: All tracks of the current

folder.

CLASSIC

(Classical music)

OFF

DISC RPT*²: All tracks of the current disc.

POPS

(Light music)

RPT OFF

: Cancels.

Random play

HIP HOP

(Funk or rap music)

JAZZ

(Jazz music)

+03

OFF

Mode

Plays at random

FLDR RND*¹: All tracks of the current

folder, then tracks of the next

folder and so on.

Adjusting the sound

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your

preference.

DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.

MAG RND*²: All tracks of the inserted

discs.

RND OFF : Cancels.

Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA

disc.

Only while playing discs in the CD

changer.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General settings — PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)

items listed in the table that follows.

Ex.: When “TRE” is selected

2 Select a PSM item.

Indication [Range]

BAS*¹(bass)

Adjust the bass. [–06 to +06]

TRE*¹(treble)

Adjust the treble. [–06 to +06]

FAD*²(fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

[R06 to F06]

Ex.: When “DIMMER” is selected

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.

BAL (balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

[L06 to R06]

LOUD*¹(loudness)

Boost low and high frequencies to produce a

well-balanced sound at low volume level.

[LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the

other PSM items if necessary.

VOL (volume)

5 Finish the procedure.

Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*³]

When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,

the adjustment you have made is stored for

the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)

including “USER.”

If you are using a two-speaker system, set the

fader level to “00.”

Depending on the amplifier gain control

setting. (See page 15 for details.)

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indications

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DEMO

Display demonstration

DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated

automatically if no operation is done for about

20 seconds, [5].

DEMO OFF : Cancels.

0 – 23 (1 – 12), [5]

[Initial: 0 (0:00)]

CLOCK H

Hour adjustment

00 – 59, [5]

[Initial: 00 (0:00)]

CLOCK M

Minute adjustment

24H/12H

Time display mode

12H O 24H, [5]

[Initial: 24H]

CLK ADJ*¹

Clock adjustment

AUTO

OFF

: [Initial]; The built-in clock is automatically adjusted

using the CT (clock time) data in the RDS signal.

: Cancels.

AF-REG*¹

Alternative frequency/

regionalization reception

When the received signals from the current FM RDS station or DAB

service become weak...

: [Initial]; Switches to another station (or service)

(the programme may differ from the one currently

received), [9, 17].

• The AF indicator lights up.

: Switches to another station broadcasting the same

programme.

• The AF and REG indicators light up.

: Cancels (not selectable when “DAB AF” is set to

“AF ON”).

AF REG

OFF

PTY-STBY*¹

PTY standby

Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [8].

OFF [Initial] = PTY codes, [9] = (back to the beginning)

TA VOL*¹

[Initial: VOL 15]; VOL 00 — VOL 30 or 50*², [8, 21]

Traffic announcement

volume

P-SEARCH*¹

Programme search

: Using the AF data, the unit tunes in to another

frequency broadcasting the same programme as the

original preset RDS station is if the preset station

signals are not sufficient.

OFF

: [Initial]; Cancels.

Only for FM RDS stations.

Depends on the amplifier gain control.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indications

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DAB AF*³

AF ON

: [Initial]; Traces the programme among DAB services

Alternative frequency

reception

and FM RDS stations, [9, 17].

: Cancels.

AF OFF

DAB VOL*³

DAB volume adjustment

You can adjust the volume level (VOL –12 — VOL +12) of DAB

tuner to match the FM sound level and store it in memory.

[Initial: VOL 00]

DIMMER

Dimmer

OFF

: Dims the display illumination of this unit.

: [Initial]; Cancels.

TEL

MUTING 1/MUTING 2 : Select either one which mutes the sounds

Telephone muting

while using a cellular phone.

: [Initial]; Cancels.

OFF

SCROLL*⁴

Scroll

ONCE

AUTO

OFF

: [Initial]; Scrolls the disc information once.

: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).

: Cancels.

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display

regardless of the setting.

EXT IN*⁵

CHANGER : [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [9], an Apple iPod

External input

or a JVC D. player, [17].

: To use any other external component than the above,

EXT IN

[19].

TAG DISP

TAG ON

: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing

Tag display

MP3/WMA tracks, [11].

TAG OFF : Cancels.

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.

LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power

of the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from

being damaged.)

AMP GAIN

Amplifier gain control

HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50

IF BAND

Intermediate frequency

filter

AUTO

WIDE

: [Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce

interference noises between close stations. (Stereo

effect may be lost.)

: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations,

but sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo

effect will remain.

Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, or DISC.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

⁄

Select a service (either primary or

secondary) to listen to.

DAB tuner operations

What is DAB system?

Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) can deliver

digital quality sound without any annoying

interference and signal distortion. Furthermore,

it can carry text, pictures, and data. When

transmitting, DAB combines several

programmes (called “services”) to form one

“ensemble.” In addition, each “service”—called

“primary service”—can also be divided into its

components (called “secondary service”). A

typical ensemble has six or more programmes

(services) broadcast at the same time.

By connecting the DAB tuner, this unit can do

the following:

To tune in to an ensemble manually

Start searching for an ensemble, as in step ! on

the left column.

2 Select the desired ensemble frequencies.

• Tracing the same programme automatically

—Alternative Frequency Reception (see

“DAB AF” on page 15).

It is recommended to use DAB tuner

KT-DB1000 with your unit. If you have

another DAB tuner, consult your JVC

IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

• Refer also to the Instructions supplied for

your DAB tuner.

Storing DAB services in memory

You can preset six DAB services (primary) for

each band.

1 Select a service you want (see steps ~

to ⁄ on the left column).

2 Select the preset number (1 – 6) you

want to store into.

Start searching for an ensemble.

When an ensemble is received, searching

stops.

Preset number flashes for a while.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tuning in to a preset DAB service

iPod®/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod

or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

2 Select the preset DAB service

(primary) number (1 – 6) you want.

• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for

controlling an iPod.

• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for

controlling a D. player.

If the selected primary service has some

secondary services, pressing the same

button again will tune in to the secondary

services.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

with the interface adapter.

Tracing the same programme—

Alternative Frequency Reception

Caution:

You can keep listening to the same programme

by activating the Alternative Frequency

Reception.

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the

vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting

or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

• While receiving a DAB service:

When driving in an area where a service

cannot be received, this unit automatically

tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS

station, broadcasting the same programme.

• While receiving an FM RDS station:

When driving in an area where a DAB service

is broadcasting the same programme as the

FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit

automatically tunes in to the DAB service.

Preparations:

Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the

external input setting, see page 15.

When shipped from the factory, Alternative

Frequency Reception is activated.

To deactivate the Alternative Frequency

Reception, see page 14 and 15.

Playback starts automatically from

where it has been paused*¹or stopped*²

previously.

To change the display information while

tuning to an ensemble

Adjust the volume.

Service name = Ensemble name = Channel

number = Frequency = Clock = (back to the

beginning)

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Confirm the selection.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 12 and 13.)

• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or

D. player is deactivated.

To move back to the previous

menu, press 5.

• If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.

• If the selected item has another layer, you

will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3

until the desired track is played.

To pause*¹or

stop*²playback

To resume

playback, press it

again.

• Holding 4 /¢

can skip 10

items at a time.

To fast-forward or

reverse the track

The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

If no operations are done for about

–

5 seconds.

To go to the next

or previous tracks

–

When you confirm the selection of a track.

For iPod

For D. player

Selecting the playback modes

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

Now the 5/∞/ 4 /¢

buttons

ONE RPT

work as the menu selecting buttons*³.

Functions the same as “Repeat One” of

the iPod or “Repeat Mode One” for the

D. player.

2 Select the desired menu.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as “Repeat All” of the

iPod or “Repeat Mode All” for the D. player.

For iPod:

RPT OFF

PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS

Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the

beginning)

Cancels.

For D. player:

PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE

ÔTRACK Ô (back to the beginning)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Random play

Other external component

operations

You can connect an external component to

the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line

Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX

Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

ALBM RND*⁴

Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of

the iPod.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of the

iPod or “Random Play On” of the D. player.

For listening to the iPod or D. player, refer to

pages 17 – 19.

RND OFF

Cancels.

For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in

“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”

To check other information while listening to

an iPod or a D. player

If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 15

and select the external input (“EXT IN”).

Turn on the connected component

and start playing the source.

Adjust the volume.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 12 and 13.)

To check the clock time while listening to an

external component

EXT IN Ô Clock

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Main elements and features

Remote controller —

RM-RK60

This unit can be remotely controlled as

instructed here (with an optionally purchased

remote controller). We recommend that you

use remote controller RM-RK60 with your unit.

Installing the lithium coin battery

(CR2025)

(standby/on attenuator) button

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is

on.

Aim the remote controller directly at the

remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is

no obstacle in between.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 SRC (source) button

Warning:

• Do not install any battery other than

CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may

explode.

• Store the battery in a place where children

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,

cracking, or starting a fire:

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble, heat

the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

– Do not leave the battery with other

metallic materials.

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or

similar tools.

• Selects the source.

3 R (reverse) / F (forward) buttons

• Searches for stations (or services) if

pressed briefly.

• Searches for ensembles if pressed and

held.

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if

pressed and held.

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

• While listening to an Apple iPod or a

JVC D. player (in menu selecting mode):

– Selects an item if pressed briefly.

(Then, press D (down) to confirm the

selection.)

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate

when throwing away or saving it.

– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and

held.

4 SOUND button

Caution:

• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom

equalizer).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5 U (up) / D (down) buttons

• Changes the FM/AM/DAB bands with

U (up).

More about this unit

• Changes the preset stations with

D (down).

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA

discs.

• While playing an MP3 disc on an

MP3-compatible CD changer:

– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

– Changes the folder if pressed and held.

• While listening to an iPod or a D. player:

– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with

D (down).

– Enter the main menu with U (up).

(Now U/D/R/F work as the menu

selecting buttons.)*

Basic operations

Turning on the power

• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can

also turn on the power. If the source is ready,

playback also starts.

Turning off the power

• If you turn off the power while listening to a

disc, disc play will start from where playback

has been stopped previously, next time you

turn on the power.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

6 VOLUME – /+ buttons

• Adjusts the volume level.

• During SSM search...

– All previously stored stations are erased and

stations are stored newly.

* U (up)

D (down) : Confirms the selection.

: Returns to the previous menu.

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

– When SSM is over, the station stored in

No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the

previously preset station is erased when a new

station is stored in the same preset number.

The unit is equipped with the steering wheel

remote control function.

• See the Installation/Connection Manual

(separate volume) for connection.

FM RDS operations

• Network-Tracking Reception requires

two types of RDS signals—PI (Programme

Identification) and AF (Alternative

Frequency) to work correctly. Without

receiving these data correctly, Network-

Tracking Reception will not operate correctly.

• If a Traffic Announcement is received by

TA Standby Reception, the volume level

automatically changes to the preset level (TA

VOL) if the current level is lower than the

preset level.

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• When Alternative Frequency Reception

is activated (with AF selected), Network-

Tracking Reception is also activated

automatically. On the other hand, Network-

Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated

without deactivating Alternative Frequency

Reception. (See page 14.)

• This unit can play back multi-session discs;

however, unclosed sessions will be skipped

while playing.

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play

back on this unit because of their disc

characteristics, or for the following reasons:

– Discs are dirty or scratched.

• If you want to know more about RDS, visit

«http://www.rds.org.uk».

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens

inside the unit.

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are

written with “Packet Write” method.

– There are improper recording conditions

(missing data, etc.) or media conditions

(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time

since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than

that of regular CDs.

Disc operations

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does

not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital

Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-

DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may

not be recommended.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective

seal stuck to the surface.

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed

by an ink jet printer.

Using these discs under high temperatures or

high humidities may cause malfunctions or

damage to the unit.

General

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/

CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),

MP3 and WMA formats.

• When a disc had been loaded, selecting

“DISC” for the playback source starts disc

play.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>

(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums,

artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,

2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA

files.

Inserting a disc

• When a disc is inserted upside down, the disc

automatically ejects.

• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and

unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into

the loading slot.

• This unit can display only one-byte

characters. No other characters can be

correctly displayed.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

meeting the conditions below:

Playing a disc

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3

or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent

sounds.

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps

– Sampling frequency:

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,

Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can play back only files of the same

type which are first detected if a disc includes

both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/

WMA files.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• The maximum number of characters for file/

folder names vary among the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo: up to 128 characters

General settings—PSM

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the

volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the

unit automatically changes the volume level to

“VOL 30.”

– Joliet: up to 64 characters

– Windows long file name: up to 128

characters

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR

(variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy

in elapsed time display, and do not show

the actual elapsed time. Especially, after

performing the search function, this

difference becomes noticeable.

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of

200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and

MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate

format.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

DAB tuner operations

• Only primary DAB services can be presetted

even when you store a secondary service.

• A previously preset DAB service is erased

when a new DAB service is stored in the same

preset number.

iPod® or D. player operations

• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D. player is charged through this unit.

• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all

operations from the iPod or D. player are

disabled. Perform all operations from this

unit.

• The text information may not be displayed

correctly.

– Some characters such as accented letters

cannot be shown correctly on the display.

– Depends on the condition of

communication between the iPod or

D. player and the unit.

• If the text information includes more than

8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see

also page 15). This unit can display up to 40

characters.

– WMA files which are not based upon

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

Notice:

Changing the source

When operating an iPod or a D. player,

some operations may not be performed

correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the

following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

• If you change the source, playback also stops

(without ejecting the disc).

Next time you select “DISC” for the playback

source, disc play starts from where it has been

stopped previously.

Ejecting a disc

• If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted

again into the loading slot to protect it from

dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert

the disc around the center holder (with the

printed surface facing up).

Maintenance

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after

use.

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the

connectors.

To keep discs clean

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe

the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth

moistened with alcohol, being careful not to

damage the connectors.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it

with a soft cloth in a straight line

from center to edge.

• Do not use any solvent (for example,

conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,

benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

Connector

To play new discs

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the

CD player in the following cases:

• After starting the heater in the car.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the CD player may

malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and

leave the unit turned on for a few hours until

the moisture evaporates.

New discs may have some rough

spots around the inner and outer

edges. If such a disc is used, this

unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges

with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:

Warped disc

How to handle discs

When removing a disc from

its case, press down the center

holder of the case and lift the disc

out, holding it by the edges.

• Always hold the disc by the

Center holder

Sticker

Sticker residue

Stick-on label

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service

center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the

speakers.

• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

• The unit does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

Store stations manually.

• SSM automatic presetting does not

work.

• Static noise while listening to the

radio.

Connect the aerial firmly.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played

back.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot

be skipped.

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component

which you used for recording.

• Disc can be neither played back nor

ejected.

• Unlock the disc (see page 11).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Check the cords and connections.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in

the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,

Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

the file names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not

add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

• A longer readout time is required

(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the

display).

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.

• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are

you have intended them to play.

recorded.

• Elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused

by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.

• “NO FILES” appears on the display.

Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• Correct characters are not displayed

(e.g. album name).

This unit can only display letters (upper case),

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

• “NO MAG” appears on the display.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Insert a disc into the magazine.

Insert the magazine.

Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly

and press the reset button of the CD changer.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

Press the reset button of the CD changer.

• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• “noSIGNAL” appears on the display. Move to an area with stronger signals.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly

and reset the unit (see page 2).

• “ANTENANG” appears on the

display.

Check the cords and connections.

• The DAB tuner does not work at all. Reconnect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly

and reset the unit (see page 2).

• The iPod or D. player does not turn

on or does not work.

• Check the connecting cable and its connection.

• Update the firmware version.

•

Change the battery.

• Buttons do not work as intended.

• The sound is distorted.

The functions of the buttons have been changed.

Press MODE before performing the operation.

Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the

iPod/D. player.

• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.

the display.

• Playback stops.

The headphones are disconnected during

playback. Restart the playback operation using

the control panel (see page 18).

• No sound can be heard when

connecting an iPod nano.

Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.

• No sound can be heard.

• “ERROR 01” appears on the display

when connecting a D. player.

Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,

connect it again.

• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”

appears on the display.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or

D. player.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and

iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Check the connection between the adapter and

this unit.

• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.

not work after disconnecting from

this unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

CD PLAYER SECTION

Maximum Power Output:

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical

pickup (semiconductor laser)

Front: 50 W per channel

Rear: 50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz

to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%

total harmonic distortion.

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Dynamic Range:

96 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit

MP3 Decoding Format:

Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz

to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%

total harmonic distortion.

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Tone Control Range:

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding

Bass:

10 dB at 100 Hz

Format:

Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps

GENERAL

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System: Negative ground

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Dimensions (W × H × D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm

Panel Size (approx.):

Other Terminals:

CD changer, Steering wheel remote input

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM: (MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz

(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz

188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm

Mass (approx.):

[FM Tuner]

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

1.4 kg (excluding accessories)

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 30 dB

Design and specifications are subject to change

without notice.

Capture Ratio: 1.5 dB

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States

and/or other countries.

[MW Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 μV

Selectivity: 35 dB

• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

[LW Tuner]

Sensitivity: 50 μV

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Haben Sie PROBLEME mit dem Betrieb?

Bitte setzen Sie Ihr Gerät zurück

Siehe Seite Zurücksetzen des Geräts

Затруднения при эксплуатации?

Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство

Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства

обратитесь на соответствующую страницу

EN, GE, RU

1105DTSMDTJEIN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KD-G421

Installation/Connection Manual

Einbau/Anschlußanleitung

Руководство по установке/подключению

GET0352-013A

[EY]

1105DTSMDTJEIN

EN, GE, RU

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

РУССКИЙ

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground

electrical systems. If your vehicle does not have this system, a

voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR

ENTERTAINMENT dealers.

Dieses Gerät ist für einen Betrieb in elektrischen Anlagen mit 12 V

Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В

Gleichstrom und (–) Erdung ausgelegt. Verfügt Ihr Fahrzeug nicht постоянного напряжения с минусом на массе. Если Ваш

über diese Anlage, ist ein Spannungsinverter erforderlich, der bei JVC

Autoradiohändler erworben werden kann.

автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор

напряжения, который может быть приобретен у дилера

автомобилнего специалиста JVC.

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ

Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем

Вам отсоединить отрицательный разъем аккумулятора и

осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.

• После установки обязательно заземлите данное

устройство на шасси автомобиля.

WARNINGS

WARNUNGEN

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the

Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen empfehlen wir, daß Sie den

battery’s negative terminal and make all electrical connections before negativen Batterieanschluß abtrennen und alle elektrischen Anschlüsse

installing the unit.

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after

installation.

herstellen, bevor das Gerät eingebaut wird.

• Sicherstellen, daß das Gerät nach dem Einbau a Chassis des

Fahrzeugs geerdet wird.

Примечания:

Notes:

Hinweise:

• Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем

указанного класса. Если предохранитель сгорает слишком

часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.

• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной

мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и передней панели

устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если

максимальная мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в

режим “AMP GAIN”, чтобы предотвратить их повреждение (см.

ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 15).

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows

frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum

• Die Sicherung mit einer der entsprechenden Nennleistung ersetzen.

Brennt die Sicherung häufig durch, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC

Autoradiohändler.

power of more than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an • Es wird empfohlen, Lautsprecher mit einer Maximalleistung von

impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W,

change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being

damaged (see page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads

with insulating tape.

mehr als 50 W anzuschließen (sowohl hinten als auch vorne, mit

einer Impedanz von 4 Ω bis 8 Ω). Wenn die Maximalleistung

weniger als 50 W beträgt, stellen Sie „AMP GAIN“ anders ein, um

Schäden an den Lautsprechern zu vermeiden (siehe Seite 15 der

BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG).

• Для предотвращения короткого замыкания заклейте

НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей лентой.

• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается.

Старайтесь его не трогать во время удаления устройства.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it

when removing this unit.

• Zur Vermeidung eines Kurzschlusses die Anschlußklemmen

der NICHT VERWENDETEN Leitungen mit Isolierklebeband

umwickeln.

• Das Abstrahlblech wird nach dem Gebrauch sehr heiß. Beim Ausbau

des Geräts darauf achten, das Abstrahlblech nicht zu berühren.

Heat sink

Abstrahlblech

Радиатор

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker VORSICHTSMASSREGELN beim Anschließen

connections: der Stromversorgung und Lautsprecher:

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и

подключению громкоговорителей:

• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к

аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе устройство будет

повреждено.

• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей

к кабелю питания громкоговорителя проверьте схему

соединений громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the • Die Lautsprecherleitungen des Netzkabels NICHT an der

car battery; otherwise, the unit will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the

speakers, check the speaker wiring in your car.

Autobatterie anschließen, da sonst das Gerät schwer

beschädigt wird.

• VOR dem Anschließen der Lautsprecherleitungen des

Spannunsgversorgungskabels an die Lautsprecher, die

Lautsprecherverdrahtung in Ihrem Auto überprüfen.

Parts list for installation and connection

Teileliste für den Einbau und Anschluß

Список деталей для установки и подключения

Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.

При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с

дилером автомобильного специалиста JVC.

The following parts are provided for this unit. If any item is missing, Die folgenden Teile werden zusammen mit diesem Gerät geliefert.

consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately. Falls ein Artikel fehlt, wenden Sie sich sofort an Ihren JVC-

Autoradiohändler.

A / B

Trim plate

Frontrahmen

Декоративную панель

Hard case/Control panel

Etui/Schalttafel

Жесткий футляр/панель управления

Sleeve

Halterung

Муфта

Washer (ø5)

Unterlegscheibe (ø5)

Шайба (њ5)

Lock nut (M5)

Sicherungsmutter (M5)

Фиксирующая гайка (M5)

Power cord

Stromkable

Кабель питания

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)

Befestigungsschraube (M5 × 20 mm)

Крепежный болт (M5 × 20 мм)

Rubber cushion

Gummipuffer

Резиновый чехол

Handles

Griffe

Рычаги

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION

EINBAU

УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В

ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)

(IN-DASH MOUNTING)

(IM ARMATURENBRETT)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have

any questions or require information regarding installation kits,

consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company

supplying kits.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed vertreibt.

by a qualified technician.

Die folgende Abbildung zeigt einen typischen Einbau. Bei

irgendwelchen Fragen oder wenn Sie Informationen hinsichtlich

des Einbausatzes brauchen, wenden Sie sich an ihren JVC

Autoradiohändler oder ein Unternehmen das diese Einbausätze

На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка.

Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы, касающиеся установки,

обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста

JVC или в компанию, поставляющую соответствующие

принадлежности.

• Sind Sie sich über den richtigen Einbau des Geräts nicht sicher, lassen • Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это

Sie es von einem qualifizierten Techniker einbauen. устройство, обратитесь к квалифицированному специалисту.

Do the required electrical connections.

Nehmen Sie die erforderlichen elektrischen

Anschlüsse vor.

Выполните необходимые подключения

контактов, как показано на оборотной

стороне этой инструкции.

When you stand the unit, be

careful not to damage the fuse

on the rear.

Beim Aufstellen des Geräts

darauf achten, daß die

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

Die geeigneten Zapfen biegen, um die

Manschette sicher festzuhalten.

Отогните соответствующие

фиксаторы, предназначенные для

прочной установки корпуса.

Sicherung auf der Rückseite

nicht beschädigt wird.

Устанавливайте устройство

таким образом, чтобы не

повредить предохранитель,

расположенный сзади.

Removing the unit

Ausbau des Geräts

Удаление устройства

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Vor dem Ausbau des Geräts den hinteren Teil freigeben.

Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.

Insert the two handles, then pull them

as illustrated so that the unit can be

removed.

Die beiden Handgriffe einsetzen und dann

ziehen wie in der Abbildung gezeigt, so

daß das Gerät entfernt werden kann.

Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните

их, как показано на рисунке, чтобы

вынуть устройство.

When using the optional stay / Beim Verwenden

der Anker-Option / При использовании

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Beim Einbau des Geräts ohne

Halterung / При установке устройства без использования муфты

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

дополнительной стойки

In einem Toyota-Automobil z.B. bauen Sie zuerst das Autoradio aus und installieren dann das Gerät an seiner Stelle.

В автомобиле Тойота, например, сначала извлеките автомобильный радиоприемник и установите устройство на место.

Stay (option)

Anker (Option)

Стойка

(дополнительно)

Fire wall

Feuerwand

Стена

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Not supplied for this unit.

Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.

Hе входит в комплект поставки.

Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*²

Bracket*²

Dashboard

Armaturenbrett

Konsole*²

Кронштейн*²

Приборная панель

Screw (option)

Schraube (Option)

Винт (дополнительно)

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Senkkopfschrauben (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*²

Pocket

Taschen

Карман

Bracket*²

Konsole*²

Кронштейн*²

Note

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are

used, they could damage the unit.

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.

Stellen Sie das Gerät mit einem Winkel von

weniger als 30˚ auf.

Hinweis

: Beim Anbringen des Gerät an der Konsole sicherstellen, daß 8 mm lange Schrauben verwendet werden. Werden

längere Schrauben verwendet, können sie das Gerät beschädigen.

Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм. При

Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.

использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.

TROUBLESHOOTING

FEHLERSUCHE

BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ

• The fuse blows.

• Die Sicherung brennt durch.

• Сработал предохранитель.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

* Sind die roten und schwarzen Leitungen richtig angeschlossen?

* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?

• Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

• Stromversorgung kann nicht eingeschaltet werden.

* Ist die gelbe Leitung angeschlossen?

• Питание не включается.

* Подключен ли желтый провод?

• No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• Sound is distorted.

• Kein Ton aus den Lautsprechern.

• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.

* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода

громкоговорителей?

Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung kurzgeschlossen?

• Ton verzerrt.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?

* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher

zusammen geerdet?

• Störgeräusche im Klang.

* Ist die hintere Erdungsklemme mit kürzeren und dickeren Kabeln an

das Fahrzeugchassis angeschlossen?

• Звук искажен.

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?

* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)

громкоговорителей?

• Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using

shorter and thicker cords?

• This unit becomes hot.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• Шум мешает звучанию.

* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси

автомобиля с помощью более короткого и тонкого шнуров?

• Gerät wird heiß.

* Ist die Lautsprecherausgangsleitung geerdet?

* Sind die „–“ Anschlußklemmen der linken und rechten Lautsprecher

zusammen geerdet?

• Устройство нагревается.

* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?

* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L)

громкоговорителей?

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

• Dieser Receiver funktioniert überhaupt nicht.

* Haben Sie einen Reset am Receiver vorgenommen?

• Приемник не работает.

* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENGLISH

DEUTSCH

РУССКИЙ

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE

ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ

If your car is equipped with the ISO

For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Bei bestimmten VW-/Audi- order Opel-

connector / Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit dem

ISO-Steckverbinder ausgestattet ist / Если

автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO

(Vauxhall-) Fahrzeugen / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi или Opel (Vauxhall)

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.

• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.

Es kann erforderlich sein, die Verdrahtung des mitgelieferten Stromkabels zu modifizieren, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.

• Wenden Sie sich vor dem Einbau dieses Receivers an Ihre Auto-Fachwerkstatt.

• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.

• Schließen Sie die ISO-Steckverbinder an, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.

• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.

Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.

• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.

Original wiring / Original verdrahtung /

Исходная схема соединений

Modified wiring 1 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 1 /

Преобразованная схема соединений 1

From the car body

Von der Fahrzeugkarosserie

От корпуса автомобиля

ISO connector

ISO-Steckverbinder

Разъем ISO

Use modified wiring

Verwenden Sie die modifizierte Verdrahtung

Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную схему

соединений

if the unit does not turn on.

wenn der Receiver nicht einschaltet.

ISO connector of the supplied power cord

ISO-Stecker des mitgelieferten Stromkabels

Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в

комплект поставки

Modified wiring 2 / Modifizierte Verdrahtung 2 /

Преобразованная схема соединений 2

Y: Yellow

Gelb

R: Red

Rot

Красный

View from the lead side

Von der Kabelseite aus gesehen

Вид со стороны выводов

Желтый

Connections without using the ISO connectors / Anschlüsse ohne Verwendung der ISO-Steckverbinder / Подключение без использования

разъемов ISO

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully.

Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.

Vor dem Anschließen: Die Verdrahtung im Fahrzeug sorgfältig

Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте

проводку в автомобиле. Неправильное подключение может

привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.

überprüfen. Falsche Anschlüsse können ernsthafte Schäden am Gerät

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car hervorrufen.

body may be different in color.

Die Leiter des Stromkabels und die Leiter des Anschlusses im Fahrzeug Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова

können sich farblich unterscheiden.

автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.

1 Cut the ISO connector.

1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.

1 Schneiden Sie den ISO-Steckverbinder auf.

2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order

2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в

specified in the illustration below.

2 Die farbigen Adern des Stromkabels in der Reihenfolge anschließen,

указанном ниже порядке.

wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt.

3 Connect the aerial cord.

4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

3 Подключите кабель антенны.

3 Das Antennenkabel anschließen.

4 Die Kabelbäume am Gerät anschließen.

4 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к

устройству.

To steering wheel remote controller (see diagram

An Lenkradfernbedienung (siehe Schaltplan

К рулевому пульту дистанционного управления (см. схему

)

To external components (see diagram

An externe Komponenten (siehe Schaltplan

К внешним устройствам (см. схему

)

Rear ground terminal

Hintere Erdungsc-anschlußklemme

Задний разъем заземления

)

15 A fuse

15 A Sicherung

Предохранитель 15 A

Not supplied for this unit.

Wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert.

Не входит в комплект поставки.

Ignition switch

Zündschalter

Переключатель зажигания

Line out (see diagram

Schutz kappen Signalausgang

(siehe Schaltplan

К выходу (см. схему

)

Aerial terminal

Antennen-

anschlußklemme

Разъем антенны

Black

Schwarz

Черный

)

To metallic body or chassis of the car

Zur metallenen Karosserie oder zum Fahrwerk des Autos

К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля

Yellow*²

Gelb*²

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (by passing the

ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

Zur einer stromführenden Anschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock zum Anschließen

an die Autobatterie (Umgehen des Zündschalters) (konstant 12 V)

К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)

(постоянный 12 В)

Желтый*²

Fuse block

Sicherungsblock

Блок предохранителя

Red

Rot

Красный

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to installation,

this lead must be connected, otherwise power cannot be

turned on.

Vor der Überprüfung der Funktionsfähigkeit des Geräts vor

dem Einbau, muß diese Leitung angeschlossen werden, da sonst

die Stromversorgung nicht eingeschaltet werden kann.

Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот

провод, иначе питание не включится.

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

Zur einer Zubehöranschlußklemme im Sicherungsblock

К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя

Blue with white stripe

Blau mit weißem Streifen

Синий с белой полосой

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)

Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern vorhanden (max. 200 mA)

К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)

Brown

Braun

Коричневый

To cellular phone system

Zur Mobiltelefon

К системе сотового телефона

White with black stripe

Weiß mit schwarzem

Streifen

White

Weiß

Белый

Gray with black stripe

Grau mit schwarzem

Streifen

Gray

Green with black stripe

Grün mit schwarzem Streifen

Green

Purple with black stripe

Purple

Grau

Grün

Lila mit schwarzem Streifen

Lila

Серый Зеленый с черной

полосой

Зеленый Пурпурный с черной

полосой

Пурпурный

Белый с черной полосой

Серый с черной полосой

Left speaker (front)

Right speaker (front)

Rechter Lautsprecher (vorne)

Правый громкоговоритель

(передний)

Left speaker (rear)

Right speaker (rear)

Rechter Lautsprecher (hinten)

Правый громкоговоритель

(задний)

Linker Lautsprecher (vorne)

Левый громкоговоритель

(передний)

Linker Lautsprecher (hinten)

Левый громкоговоритель

(задний)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting the external amplifier / Anschließen des externen Verstärkers / Подключение внешнего усилителя

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote

lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through

this unit.

Sie können einen Verstärker anschließen, um Ihre Autostereoanlage zu

erweitern.

• Schließen Sie das Fernbedienungskabel (blau mit weißem Streifen) an

das Fernbedienungskabel des anderen Geräts an, so daß es über dieses

Gerät gesteuert werden kann.

• Die Lautsprecher von diesem Gerät abtrennen und am

Verstärker anschließen. Die Lautsprecherleitungen dieses

Geräts unbenutzt lassen.

Можно подключить усилитель для обновления автомобильной

стереосистемы.

• Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с

белой полосой) к проводу внешнего устройства другого

оборудования так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого

устройства.

• Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного

устройства, подключите их к усилителю. Оставьте

провода громкоговорителей данного устройства

неиспользованными.

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the

amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Remote lead

Fernbedienungsleitung

Провод внешнего устройства

Y-Anschluß (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)

Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)

Rear speakers

Hintere Lautsprecher

Задние

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any

Zum Zusatzkabel des anderen Geräts oder der Motorantenne, sofern

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

Fernbedienungsleitung (Blau mit weißem Streifen)

Провод внешнего устройства (Синий с белой полосой)

vorhanden

громкоговорители

К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны

Firmly attach the ground wire to the

metallic body or to the chassis of the

car—to the place uncoated with paint (if

coated with paint, remove the paint before

attaching the wire). Failure to do so may

cause damage to the unit.

Verbinden Sie den Erdungsleiter mit

der Karosserie oder dem Rahmen des

Fahrzeugs. Die Kontaktstelle darf nicht

lackiert sein (sollte die Kontaktstelle

lackiert sein, entfernen Sie den Lack

der Kontaktstelle, bevor Sie den Leiter

befestigen). Wenn der Erdungsleiter nicht

ordnungsgemäß angeschlossen wird, kann

dieses Gerät beschädigt werden.

Плотно прикрепите заземляющий

провод к металлическому кузову

или шасси автомобиля—в месте, не

покрытом краской (если оно покрыто

краской, удалите краску перед тем, как

прикреплять провод). Невыполнение

этого требования может привести к

повреждению данного устройства.

JVC Amplifier

JVC Verstärker

JVC-усилитель

Rear speakers

Hintere Lautsprecher

Задние громкоговорители

Front speakers (see diagram

Vordere Lautsprecher (siehe

Schaltplan

Передние громкоговорители

(см. схему

)

Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO

)

connector and connect them to the amplifier.

Schneiden Sie die hinteren Lautsprecherkabel des

ISO-Steckverbinders des Fahrzeugs ab, und

schließen diese an den Verstärker an.

)

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Einzelleitung (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)

Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)

Отрежьте провода задних громкоговорителей

разъема ISO и подсоедините их к усилителю.

Connecting the external components / Anschließen der externen Komponenten / Подключение внешних устройств

CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD-Wechsler, DAB-Tuner, Apple iPod® oder JVC D. Player / Устройство автоматической смены

компакт-дисков, тюнер DAB, Apple iPod® или проигрыватель JVC D.

• Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Stellen Sie „CHANGER“ für externe Eingangseinstellung ein (Siehe Seite 15 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.) /

Установите для внешнего входа значение “CHANGER” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 15.)

You can connect these components in series as illustrated below. The iPod*⁶or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

Sie können diese Komponenten in Reihe anschließen, wie in der Abbildung unten gezeigt. Der iPod*⁶oder D. Player kann mit einem Schnittstellenadapter angeschlossen werden (nicht mitgeliefert)—KS-PD100

(für iPod) oder KS-PD500 (für D. Player).

Эти внешние устройства можно подключать параллельно, как показано на рисунке. Проигрыватель iPod*⁶или D. можно подключить с помощью интерфейсного адаптера (не входит в комплект

поставки)—KS-PD100 (для iPod) или KS-PD500 (для проигрывателя D.).

Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Anschluss 1 (integrierter Anschluss) /

Соединение 1 (интегрированное соединение)

Apple iPod

(separately purchased)

Apple iPod (getrennt gekauft)

Apple iPod

CAUTION / ACHTUNG / ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ:

(продается отдельно)

oder

или

•

Before connecting the external components,

make sure that the unit is turned off.

JVC D. player

(separately purchased)

JVC D. Player

(getrennt gekauft)

Проигрыватель JVC D.

(продается отдельно)

• Vor dem Anschließen der externen Komponenten

sicherstellen, dass das Gerät ausgeschaltet ist.

• Перед подключением внешних компонентов

убедитесь в том, что устройство выключено.

JVC CD changer

JVC DAB tuner

CD-Wechsler von JVC

DAB-Tuner von JVC

Устройство автоматической

Тюнер DAB JVC

смены компакт-дисков JVC

CD changer jack / Buchse für CD-Wechsler /

Разъем устройства автоматической

смены компакт-дисков

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

iPod ist ein Warenzeichen von Apple Computer, Inc.,

eingetragen in den USA und anderen Ländern.

iPod является торговой маркой Apple Computer,

Inc., зарегистрированной в США и других

странах.

Apple iPod

Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Anschluss 2 (alternativer Anschluss) /

Соединение 2 (альтернативное соединение)

(separately purchased)

Apple iPod (getrennt gekauft)

Apple iPod

(продается отдельно)

oder

или

Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer or

DAB tuner

JVC D. player

(separately purchased)

JVC D. Player

(getrennt gekauft)

Проигрыватель JVC D.

(продается отдельно)

Anschließen des für CD-Wechsler oder DAB-Tuner

mitgelieferten Kabels

JVC CD changer

oder

или

JVC DAB tuner

DAB-Tuner von JVC

Тюнер DAB JVC

Подключение кабеля, входящего в комплект

поставки устройства автоматической смены

компакт-дисков или тюнера DAB

CD-Wechsler von JVC

Устройство автоматической

смены компакт-дисков JVC

CD changer jack / Buchse für CD-Wechsler /

Разъем устройства автоматической

смены компакт-дисков

Other external component / Andere externe Komponenten / Другое внешнее устройство

• Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 15 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Stellen Sie „EXT IN“ für externe Eingangseinstellung ein (Siehe Seite 15 der BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG.) / Установите для

внешнего входа значение “EXT IN” (Cм. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 15.)

External component

Externe Komponente

Внешнее устройство

CD changer jack

Buchse für CD-Wechsler

Разъем устройства

автоматической смены

компакт-дисков

Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

Line-Eingangsadapter KS-U57 (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)

Коммуникационный адаптер KS-U57 (не входит в комплект поставки)

External component

Externe Komponente

Внешнее устройство

AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

3,5-mm-Stereo-Ministecker

Мини-разъем стерео-3,5 мм

AUX-Eingangsadapter KS-U58 (wird nicht mit Gerät mitgeliefert)

Адаптер для подключения дополнительных устройств KS-U58 (не входит в комплект поставки)

Connecting to the steering wheel remote controller / Anschluß an die Lenkradfernbedienung / Подключение к рулевому пульту

дистанционного управления

If your car is equipped with the steering wheel remote controller, you can operate this unit using the

controller. To do it, a JVC’s OE remote adapter (not supplied) which matches with your car is required.

Consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer for details.

Wenn Ihr Fahrzeug mit einer Lenkradferndienung ausgestattet ist, können Sie damit diesen Receiver steuern.

Hierfür ist ein für Ihr Fahrzeug passender Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption von JVC (nicht im

Lieferumfang enthalten) erforderlich. Für weitere Einzelheiten wenden Sie sich an Ihren JVC Autoradiohändler.

Если автомобиль оборудован рулевым пультом дистанционного управления, его можно

использовать для управления данным устройством. Для этого необходим адаптер рулевого пульта

дистанционного управления JVC OE (не поставляется), подходящий для Вашего автомобиля. За более

подробной информацией обратитесь к поставщику автомобильных аудиосистем компании JVC.

OE remote adapter (not supplied)

Steering wheel remote input

Eingang für Lenkradfernbedienung

Вход рулевого пульта

Radio-Lenkrad-Fernbedienungsadaption (nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten)

Aдаптер рулевого пульта дистанционного управления OE (не

поставляется)

дистанционного управления

Steering wheel remote controller (equipped in the car)

Lenkradfernbedienung (im Fahrzeug installiert)

Рулевой пульт дистанционного управления (устанавливаемый

в автомобиле)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD RECEIVER

KD-G424

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS

GET0351-001A

[UI]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to

obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave

all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.

Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

Warning:

How to forcibly eject a disc

If you need to operate the unit while driving,

be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be

involved in a traffic accident.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

Caution on volume setting:

How to detach/attach the control

panel

Discs produce very little noise compared

with other sources. Lower the volume

before playing a disc to avoid damaging

the speakers by the sudden increase of the

output level.

How to reset your unit

Detaching...

Attaching...

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

• If a disc is loaded, it will eject. Be careful not to

drop the disc.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to read this manual

• Button operations are mainly explained with

the illustrations in the table below.

CONTENTS

• Some related tips and notes are explained in

“More about this unit” (see pages 17 – 19).

Control panel ...................................

Remote controller — ^RM-RK50..............

Getting started.................................

Basic operations....................................................

Press briefly.

Radio operations ..............................

Press repeatedly.

Disc operations.................................

Playing a disc in the unit ......................................

Playing discs in the CD changer ............................

Press either

one.

Sound adjustments........................... 11

General settings — PSM ................... 12

iPod®/D. player operations ................ 14

Other external component operations... 16

Maintenance .................................... 16

More about this unit ......................... 17

Troubleshooting............................... 19

Specifications................................... 21

Press and hold until your

desired response begins.

Press and hold both

buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations.

: Indicator displayed for the

corresponding operation.

How to use the MODE button

If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions

mode, then the number buttons and 5/∞

buttons work as different function buttons.

Ex.: When number button 2 works as

MO (monaural) button.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as

this will block outside sounds, making driving

dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any

complicated operations.

Time countdown indicator

Temperature inside the car...

To use these buttons for their original

functions again after pressing MODE, wait for

5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons

until the functions mode is cleared or press

MODE again.

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot

or cold weather, wait until the temperature in

the car becomes normal before operating the

unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control panel

Parts identification

Display window

1 4 /¢

buttons

Display window

a Disc information indicators—TAG (ID3

(standby/on attenuator) button

3 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

4 Loading slot

5 Display window

6 0 (eject) button

7 EQ (equalizer) button

8 Remote sensor

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong

light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

9 SRC (source) button

p BAND button

Tag),

(folder),

(track/file)

s Disc type indicators—WMA, MP3

d Playback source indicators—

CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is

selected as the playback source.

DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player.

f Playback mode / item indicators—

RND (random),

RPT (repeat)

g LOUD (loudness) indicator

h EQ (equalizer) indicator

j Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)

indicators—JAZZ, CLASSIC, HIP HOP,

POPS, ROCK, USER

(disc),

(folder),

q Control dial

w SEL (select) button

e MO (monaural) button

r SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

button

k Tr (track) indicator

l Source display / Volume level indicator

/ Main display

z Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),

MO (monaural)

t Number buttons

y RPT (repeat) button

u RND (random) button

i MODE button

o DISP (display) button

;

(control panel release) button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Main elements and features

Remote controller —

RM-RK50

Installing the lithium coin battery

(CR2025)

(standby/on/attenuator) button

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is

on.

Aim the remote controller directly at the

remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is

no obstacle in between.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons

• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.

• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA

discs.

Warning:

• Do not install any battery other than

CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may

explode.

• Store the battery in a place where children

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,

cracking, or starting a fire:

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble,

heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

– Do not leave the battery with other

metallic materials.

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or

similar tools.

• While playing an MP3 disc on an

MP3-compatible CD changer:

– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

– Changes the folder if pressed and held.

• While listening to an Apple iPod or a

JVC D. player:

– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with

D ∞.

– Enters the main menu with 5 U.

(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the

menu selecting buttons.)*

3 VOL – / VOL + buttons

• Adjusts the volume level.

4 SOUND button

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate

when throwing away or saving it.

• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom

equalizer).

5 SOURCE button

Caution:

• Selects the source.

* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.

D ∞ : Confirms the selection.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if

pressed and held.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 11 and 12.)

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

• While listening to an iPod or a D. player

(in menu selecting mode):

– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,

press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)

– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and

held.

To drop the volume in a

moment (ATT)

To restore the sound, press

it again.

To turn off the power

Getting started

Basic settings

Basic operations

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages

12 and 13.

Turn on the power.

1 Canceling the display

demonstrations

* You cannot select these sources if they

are not ready or not connected.

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”

2 Setting the clock

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust

the hour.

⁄

For FM/AM tuner

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then

adjust the minute.

3 Finish the procedure.

Adjust the volume.

To check the current clock

time when the power is

turned off

Volume level appears.

Volume level indicator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to

receive

Radio operations

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be

lost.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO

indicator goes off.

Selected band appears.

Start searching for a station.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential

Memory)

When a station is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

want to store into.

2 Select a desired station frequency.

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when

automatic presetting is over.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically in the FM

band.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset

Disc operations

number 4 of the FM1 band.

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you

change the source or eject the disc.

Preset number flashes for a while.

To stop play and eject the

disc

Listening to a preset station

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you

want.

* If you have changed the external input

setting to “EXT IN” (see page 13), you

cannot select the CD changer.

Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 – 06:

To check the other information while

listening to an FM or AM station

For disc number from 07 – 12:

Clock Ô Frequency

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About MP3 and WMA discs

To go to the next or previous folders (only for

MP3 or WMA discs)

MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and

“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded

in “folders.”

For MP3 discs:

For WMA discs:

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.

• You can also connect other CH-X series CD

changers (except CH-X99 and CH-X100).

These units are not compatible with MP3

discs.

• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD

changer.

• You cannot use the KD-MK series CD

changers with this unit.

• Disc text information recorded in the CD

Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text

compatible CD changer is connected.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly

To select a number from 01 – 06:

To select a number from 07 – 12:

To fast-forward or reverse the track

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA

discs, it is required that folders are assigned

with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their

folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

To go to the next or previous tracks

To select a particular track in a folder (for

MP3 or WMA discs):

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other main functions

Changing the display information

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks

within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks

whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

While playing an MP3 or a WMA^*²disc

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”

(see page 13)

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”

: Clock with the current track number

Each time you press the button, you can

skip 10 tracks.

• After the last track, the first track will be

selected and vice versa.

: Elapsed playing time with the current

track number

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

If the current disc is an audio CD,

“NO NAME” appears.

Only for the built-in CD player.

If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag

information, folder name and file name

appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will

not light up.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting the playback modes

Sound adjustments

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to

the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

You can use only one of the following playback

modes at a time.

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

Ex.: When “ROCK” is selected

Mode

Plays repeatedly

Preset values

BAS

TRE

LOUD

TRK RPT

: The current track.

(bass) (treble) (loudness)

Indication (For)

FLDR RPT*⁴: All tracks of the current

folder.

USER

OFF

DISC RPT*⁵: All tracks of the current disc.

(Flat sound)

ROCK

+03

+01

+04

+02

+01

–02

+01

RPT OFF

: Cancels.

(Rock or disco music)

Random play

CLASSIC

OFF

(Classical music)

POPS

Mode

Plays at random

(Light music)

FLDR RND*⁴: All tracks of the current

folder, then tracks of the next

folder and so on.

HIP HOP

(Funk or rap music)

JAZZ

DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.

+03

OFF

(Jazz music)

MAG RND*⁵: All tracks of the inserted

discs.

RND OFF : Cancels.

Adjusting the sound

Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your

preference.

disc.

Only while playing discs in the CD

changer.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General settings — PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)

items listed in the table that follows.

Indication [Range]

BAS*¹(bass)

Adjust the bass. [–06 to +06]

2 Select a PSM item.

TRE*¹(treble)

Adjust the treble. [–06 to +06]

FAD*²(fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

[R06 to F06]

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.

BAL*³(balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

[L06 to R06]

LOUD*¹(loudness)

Boost low and high frequencies to produce

a well-balanced sound at low volume level.

[LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]

Ex.: When “DIMMER” is selected

SUB.W*⁴(subwoofer)

Adjust the subwoofer output level. [00 to 08]

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other

PSM items if necessary.

VOL (volume)

Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*⁵]

5 Finish the procedure.

When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,

the adjustment you have made is stored for

the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)

including “USER.”

If you are using a two-speaker system, set the

fader level to “00.”

This adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer

output.

This takes effect only when a subwoofer is

connected.

Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to

“WOOFER” (see page 13).

Depending on the amplifier gain control

setting. (See page 13 for details.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indications

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DEMO

DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated

Display

demonstration

automatically if no operation is done for about 20 seconds,

[6].

DEMO OFF : Cancels.

1 – 12, [6]

[Initial: 1 (1:00)]

CLOCK H

Hour adjustment

00 – 59, [6]

[Initial: 00 (1:00)]

CLOCK M

Minute adjustment

DIMMER

Dimmer

OFF

: Dims the display illumination of this unit.

: [Initial]; Cancels.

SCROLL*⁶

Scroll

ONCE

AUTO

OFF

: [Initial]; Scrolls the disc information once.

: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).

: Cancels.

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless

of the setting.

WOOFER*⁷

Subwoofer cutoff

frequency

LOW

MID

: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

: [Initial]; Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the

subwoofer.

HIGH

: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

EXT IN*⁸

CHANGER : [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [8], an Apple iPod or a

External input

JVC D. player, [14].

: To use any other external component than the above, [16].

EXT IN

When connecting the amplifier or subwoofer, set this correctly.

L/O MODE

Line output mode

REAR

: [Initial]; Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used

for connecting the speakers through an external amplifier.

WOOFER : Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for

connecting a subwoofer through an external amplifier.

TAG DISP

TAG ON

: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/

Tag display

WMA tracks, [10].

TAG OFF : Cancels.

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.

LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of

the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from being

damaged.)

AMP GAIN

Amplifier gain

control

HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”

Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, or DISC.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 11 and 12.)

• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or

D. player is deactivated.

iPod®/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod

or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

To pause*¹or

stop*²playback

To resume

playback, press it

again.

• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for

controlling an iPod.

• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for

controlling a D. player.

To fast-forward or

reverse the track

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

with the interface adapter.

To go to the next

or previous tracks

For iPod

For D. player

Caution:

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the

vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting

or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

Preparations:

Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the

external input setting, see page 13.

Now the 5/∞/4 /¢

buttons

work as the menu selecting buttons*³.

2 Select the desired menu.

Playback starts automatically from

where it has been paused*¹or stopped*²

previously.

For iPod:

PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS

Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the

beginning)

Adjust the volume.

For D. player:

PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE

Ô TRACK Ô (back to the beginning)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Confirm the selection.

Random play

To move back to the previous

menu, press 5.

ALBM RND*⁴

Functions the same as “Shuffle Album” of

the iPod.

• If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.

• If the selected item has another layer, you

will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3

until the desired track is played.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of the

iPod or “Random Play On” of the D. player.

• Holding 4 /¢

items at a time.

can skip 10

RND OFF

Cancels.

The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

If no operations are done for about

For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in

“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”

–

5 seconds.

–

When you confirm the selection of a track.

To check the other information while

listening to an iPod or a D. player

Selecting the playback modes

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

ONE RPT

Functions the same as “Repeat One” of

the iPod or “Repeat Mode One” for the

D. player.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as “Repeat All” of the

iPod or “Repeat Mode All” for the D. player.

RPT OFF

Cancels.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other external component Maintenance

operations

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the

connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe

the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth

moistened with alcohol, being careful not to

damage the connectors.

You can connect an external component to

the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line

Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX

Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

For listening to the iPod or D. player, refer to

pages 14 and 15.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the

CD player in the following cases:

If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 13

and select the external input (“EXT IN”).

• After starting the heater in the car.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the CD player may

malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and

leave the unit turned on for a few hours until

the moisture evaporates.

Turn on the connected component

and start playing the source.

Adjust the volume.

How to handle discs

Center holder

When removing a disc from

its case, press down the center

holder of the case and lift the

disc out, holding it by the edges.

• Always hold the disc by the

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 11 and 12.)

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert

the disc around the center holder (with the

printed surface facing up).

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after

use.

To check the other information while

listening to an external component

Clock Ô EXT IN

To keep discs clean

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it

with a soft cloth in a straight line

from center to edge.

• Do not use any solvent (for example,

conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,

benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Disc operations

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough

spots around the inner and outer

edges. If such a disc is used, this

unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with

a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does

not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital

Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-

DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may

not be recommended.

General

Do not use the following discs:

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/

CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),

MP3 and WMA formats.

• When a disc has been loaded, selecting

“DISC” for the playback source starts disc

play.

Warped disc

Sticker

Sticker residue

Stick-on label

Inserting a disc

• When a disc is inserted upside down, the disc

automatically ejects.

• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and

unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into

the loading slot.

More about this unit

Basic operations

Turning on the power

• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn

on the power. If the source is ready, playback

also starts.

Playing a disc

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3

or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent

sounds.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

Turning off the power

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can play back only files of the same

type which are first detected if a disc includes

both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/

WMA files.

• If you turn off the power while listening to a

disc, disc play will start from where playback

has been stopped previously, next time you

turn on the power.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs;

however, unclosed sessions will be skipped

while playing.

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play

back on this unit because of their disc

characteristics, or for the following reasons:

– Discs are dirty or scratched.

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens

inside the unit.

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

• During SSM search...

– All previously stored stations are erased and

stations are stored newly.

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

– When SSM is over, the station stored in

No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the

previously preset station is erased when a new

station is stored in the same preset number.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are

written with “Packet Write” method.

– There are improper recording conditions

(missing data, etc.) or media conditions

(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time

since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than

that of regular CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective

seal stuck to the surface.

– Discs on which labels can be directly

printed by an ink jet printer.

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR

(variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy

in elapsed time display, and do not show

the actual elapsed time. Especially, after

performing the search function, this

difference becomes noticeable.

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of

200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and

MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate

format.

Using these discs under high temperatures or

high humidities may cause malfunctions or

damage to the unit.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

– WMA files which are not based upon

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>

(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums,

artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,

2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA

files.

• This unit can display only one-byte

characters. No other characters can be

correctly displayed.

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

Changing the source

• If you change the source, playback also stops

(without ejecting the disc).

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

meeting the conditions below:

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps

Next time you select “DISC” for the playback

source, disc play starts from where it has been

stopped previously.

– Sampling frequency:

Ejecting a disc

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,

Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

• The maximum number of characters for file/

folder names vary among the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo: up to 128 characters

– Joliet: up to 64 characters

– Windows long file name: up to 128

characters

• If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted

again into the loading slot to protect it from

dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

General settings—PSM

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the

volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the

unit automatically changes the volume level to

“VOL 30.”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

iPod or D. player operations

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player,

some operations may not be performed

correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the

following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D. player is charged through this unit.

• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all

operations from the iPod or D. player are

disabled. Perform all operations from this

unit.

• If the text information includes more than

8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see

also page 13). This unit can display up to 40

characters.

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service

center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the

speakers.

• The unit does not work at all.

• SSM automatic presetting does not

work.

• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

Store stations manually.

• Static noise while listening to the radio. Connect the antenna firmly.

• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back. • Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component

skipped.

which you used for recording.

• Unlock the disc (see page 10).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Disc can be neither played back nor

ejected.

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.

• Check the cords and connections.

Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in

the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,

Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

the file names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not

add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• A longer readout time is required

(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the

display).

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.

• Tracks do not play back in the order

you have intended them to play.

• Elapsed playing time is not correct.

Playback order is determined when the files are

recorded.

This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused

by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.

Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• “NO FILES” appears on the display.

• Correct characters are not displayed

(e.g. album name).

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

This unit can only display letters (upper case),

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.

Insert a disc into the magazine.

• “NO MAG” appears on the display.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Insert the magazine.

Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly

and press the reset button of the CD changer.

Press the reset button of the CD changer.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

• The CD changer does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• The iPod or D. player does not turn

on or does not work.

• Check the connecting cable and its connection.

• Update the firmware version.

•

Change the battery.

• Buttons do not work as intended.

• The sound is distorted.

The functions of the buttons have been changed.

Press MODE before performing the operation.

Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the

iPod/D. player.

• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.

the display.

• Playback stops.

The headphones are disconnected during

playback. Restart the playback operation using the

control panel (see page 14).

• No sound can be heard when

connecting an iPod nano.

Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.

• No sound can be heard.

Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,

connect it again.

• “ERROR 01” appears on the display

when connecting a D. player.

• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”

appears on the display.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or

D. player.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and

iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.

Check the connection between the adapter and

this unit.

• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.

not work after disconnecting from

this unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

CD PLAYER SECTION

Maximum Power Output:

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical

pickup (semiconductor laser)

Front: 50 W per channel

Rear: 50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz

to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%

total harmonic distortion.

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Dynamic Range:

96 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit

MP3 Decoding Format:

Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz

to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%

total harmonic distortion.

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Tone Control Range:

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding

Bass:

10 dB at 100 Hz

Format:

Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps

GENERAL

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System: Negative ground

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Other Terminal: CD changer

Dimensions (W × H × D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm

Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm

Mass (approx.):

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

[FM Tuner]

1.4 kg (excluding accessories)

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

Design and specifications are subject to change

without notice.

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 30 dB

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States

and/or other countries.

Capture Ratio: 1.5 dB

[AM Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 μV

Selectivity: 35 dB

• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

1105DTSMDTJEIN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KD-G424

Installation/Connection Manual

GET0351-002A

[UI]

1105DTSMDTJEIN

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does

not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information

regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

WARNINGS

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all

electrical connections before installing the unit.

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.

Notes:

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio

dealer.

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more

than 50 W (both at the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω

to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than 50 W, change “AMP GAIN”

setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged

(see page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads

with insulating tape.

Heat sink

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when

removing this unit.

When you stand the unit,

be careful not to damage

the fuse on the rear.

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit

will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in

your car.

Do the required electrical

connections.

Parts list for installation and connection

The following parts are provided for this unit. After checking them, please set them correctly.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold

the sleeve firmly in place.

Removing the unit

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

A / B

Hard case/Control panel

Sleeve

Trim plate

Washer (ø5)

Lock nut (M5)

Mounting bolt

(M5 × 20 mm)

Power cord

Insert the two handles, then pull them as

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

When using the optional stay

When installing the unit without

using the sleeve

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car

Rubber cushion

Remote controller

Handles

Battery

Stay (option)

Fire wall

TROUBLESHOOTING

• The fuse blows.

radio and install the unit in its place.

Not supplied

for this unit.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Dashboard

• Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

• No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

Screw (option)

Bracket*²

• Sound is distorted.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

Pocket

Flat type screws

(M5 × 8 mm)*²

• Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

Bracket*²

• This unit becomes hot.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

Note :

Install the unit at an

angle of less than 30˚.

When installing the unit on the mounting bracket,

make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer

screws are used, they could damage the unit.

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A ^{Typical connections}

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

To external components (see diagram

)

Rear ground

15 A fuse

Not supplied for this unit.

Ignition switch

Line out (see diagram

)

Antenna terminal

Black

To metallic body or chassis of the car

Yellow *²

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery

(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

Red

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

Fuse block

Blue

To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)

Blue with white stripe

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to

installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise

power cannot be turned on.

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)

White with black stripe

White

Gray with black stripe

Gray

Green with black stripe

Green

Purple with black stripe

Purple

Left speaker (front)

Right speaker (front)

Left speaker (rear)

Right speaker (rear)

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to

the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with paint (if

coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the

wire). Failure to do so may cause damage to the unit.

B ^{Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer}

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it can be controlled through this unit.

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker leads of this unit unused.

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Remote lead

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic antenna if any

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

You can also connect a subwoofer to the REAR LINE OUT

terminals.

Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

You can connect a power amplifier for rear speakers.

JVC Amplifier

Subwoofer

Rear speakers

Front speakers

C ^{Connecting the external components}

CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player

• Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

Apple iPod

(separately purchased)

You can connect these components as illustrated below.

The iPod*⁵or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—

KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

CAUTION :

• Before connecting the external

components, make sure that the unit is

turned off.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer,

Inc., registered in the U.S. and other

countries.

JVC D. player

(separately purchased)

JVC CD changer

Connecting cord supplied for your CD

changer

CD changer jack

Other external component

• Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

External component

CD changer jack

External component

Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD RECEIVER

KD-G425

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS

GET0350-001A

[U/UH]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to

obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave

all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.

Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

Warning:

How to forcibly eject a disc

If you need to operate the unit while driving,

be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be

involved in a traffic accident.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

Caution on volume setting:

How to detach/attach the control

panel

Discs produce very little noise compared

with other sources. Lower the volume

before playing a disc to avoid damaging

the speakers by the sudden increase of the

output level.

How to reset your unit

Detaching...

Attaching...

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

• If a disc is loaded, it will eject. Be careful not to

drop the disc.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to read this manual

• Button operations are mainly explained with

the illustrations in the table below.

CONTENTS

• Some related tips and notes are explained in

“More about this unit” (see pages 17 – 19).

Control panel ...................................

Remote controller — ^RM-RK50..............

Getting started.................................

Basic operations....................................................

Press briefly.

Radio operations ..............................

Press repeatedly.

Disc operations.................................

Playing a disc in the unit ......................................

Playing discs in the CD changer ............................

Press either

one.

Sound adjustments........................... 11

General settings — PSM ................... 12

iPod®/D. player operations ................ 14

Other external component operations... 16

Maintenance .................................... 16

More about this unit ......................... 17

Troubleshooting............................... 19

Specifications................................... 21

Press and hold until your

desired response begins.

Press and hold both

buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations.

: Indicator displayed for the

corresponding operation.

How to use the MODE button

If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions

mode, then the number buttons and 5/∞

buttons work as different function buttons.

Ex.: When number button 2 works as

MO (monaural) button.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as

this will block outside sounds, making driving

dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any

complicated operations.

Time countdown indicator

Temperature inside the car...

To use these buttons for their original

functions again after pressing MODE, wait for

5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons

until the functions mode is cleared or press

MODE again.

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot

or cold weather, wait until the temperature in

the car becomes normal before operating the

unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control panel

Parts identification

Display window

1 4 /¢

buttons

Display window

a Disc information indicators—TAG (ID3

(standby/on attenuator) button

3 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

4 Loading slot

5 Display window

6 0 (eject) button

7 EQ (equalizer) button

8 Remote sensor

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong

light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

9 SRC (source) button

p BAND button

Tag),

(folder),

(track/file)

s Disc type indicators—WMA, MP3

d Playback source indicators—

CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is

selected as the playback source.

DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player.

f Playback mode / item indicators—

RND (random),

RPT (repeat)

g LOUD (loudness) indicator

h EQ (equalizer) indicator

j Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)

indicators—JAZZ, CLASSIC, HIP HOP,

POPS, ROCK, USER

(disc),

(folder),

q Control dial

w SEL (select) button

e MO (monaural) button

r SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

button

k Tr (track) indicator

l Source display / Volume level indicator

/ Main display

z Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),

MO (monaural)

t Number buttons

y RPT (repeat) button

u RND (random) button

i MODE button

o DISP (display) button

;

(control panel release) button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Main elements and features

Remote controller —

RM-RK50

Installing the lithium coin battery

(CR2025)

(standby/on/attenuator) button

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is

on.

Aim the remote controller directly at the

remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is

no obstacle in between.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons

• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.

• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA

discs.

Warning:

• Do not install any battery other than

CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may

explode.

• Store the battery in a place where children

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,

cracking, or starting a fire:

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble,

heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

– Do not leave the battery with other

metallic materials.

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or

similar tools.

• While playing an MP3 disc on an

MP3-compatible CD changer:

– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

– Changes the folder if pressed and held.

• While listening to an Apple iPod or a

JVC D. player:

– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with

D ∞.

– Enters the main menu with 5 U.

(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the

menu selecting buttons.)*

3 VOL – / VOL + buttons

• Adjusts the volume level.

4 SOUND button

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate

when throwing away or saving it.

• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom

equalizer).

5 SOURCE button

Caution:

• Selects the source.

* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.

D ∞ : Confirms the selection.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if

pressed and held.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 11 and 12.)

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

• While listening to an iPod or a D. player

(in menu selecting mode):

– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,

press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)

– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and

held.

To drop the volume in a

moment (ATT)

To restore the sound, press

it again.

To turn off the power

Getting started

Basic settings

Basic operations

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages

12 and 13.

Turn on the power.

1 Canceling the display

demonstrations

* You cannot select these sources if they

are not ready or not connected.

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”

2 Setting the clock

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust

the hour.

⁄

For FM/AM tuner

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then

adjust the minute.

3 Finish the procedure.

Adjust the volume.

To check the current clock

time when the power is

turned off

Volume level appears.

Volume level indicator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to

receive

Radio operations

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be

lost.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO

indicator goes off.

Selected band appears.

Start searching for a station.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential

Memory)

When a station is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

want to store into.

2 Select a desired station frequency.

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when

automatic presetting is over.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically in the FM

band.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset

Disc operations

number 4 of the FM1 band.

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you

change the source or eject the disc.

Preset number flashes for a while.

To stop play and eject the

disc

Listening to a preset station

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you

want.

* If you have changed the external input

setting to “EXT IN” (see page 13), you

cannot select the CD changer.

Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 – 06:

To check the other information while

listening to an FM or AM station

For disc number from 07 – 12:

Clock Ô Frequency

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About MP3 and WMA discs

To go to the next or previous folders (only for

MP3 or WMA discs)

MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and

“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded

in “folders.”

For MP3 discs:

For WMA discs:

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.

• You can also connect other CH-X series CD

changers (except CH-X99 and CH-X100).

These units are not compatible with MP3

discs.

• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD

changer.

• You cannot use the KD-MK series CD

changers with this unit.

• Disc text information recorded in the CD

Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text

compatible CD changer is connected.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly

To select a number from 01 – 06:

To select a number from 07 – 12:

To fast-forward or reverse the track

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA

discs, it is required that folders are assigned

with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their

folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

To go to the next or previous tracks

To select a particular track in a folder (for

MP3 or WMA discs):

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other main functions

Changing the display information

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks

within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks

whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

While playing an MP3 or a WMA^*²disc

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”

(see page 13)

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”

: Clock with the current track number

Each time you press the button, you can

skip 10 tracks.

• After the last track, the first track will be

selected and vice versa.

: Elapsed playing time with the current

track number

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

If the current disc is an audio CD,

“NO NAME” appears.

Only for the built-in CD player.

If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag

information, folder name and file name

appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will

not light up.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting the playback modes

Sound adjustments

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to

the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

You can use only one of the following playback

modes at a time.

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

Ex.: When “ROCK” is selected

Mode

Plays repeatedly

Preset values

BAS

TRE

LOUD

TRK RPT

: The current track.

(bass) (treble) (loudness)

Indication (For)

FLDR RPT*⁴: All tracks of the current

folder.

USER

OFF

DISC RPT*⁵: All tracks of the current disc.

(Flat sound)

ROCK

+03

+01

+04

+02

+01

–02

+01

RPT OFF

: Cancels.

(Rock or disco music)

Random play

CLASSIC

OFF

(Classical music)

POPS

Mode

Plays at random

(Light music)

FLDR RND*⁴: All tracks of the current

folder, then tracks of the next

folder and so on.

HIP HOP

(Funk or rap music)

JAZZ

DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.

+03

OFF

(Jazz music)

MAG RND*⁵: All tracks of the inserted

discs.

RND OFF : Cancels.

Adjusting the sound

Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your

preference.

disc.

Only while playing discs in the CD

changer.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General settings — PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)

items listed in the table that follows.

Indication [Range]

BAS*¹(bass)

Adjust the bass. [–06 to +06]

2 Select a PSM item.

TRE*¹(treble)

Adjust the treble. [–06 to +06]

FAD*²(fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

[R06 to F06]

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.

BAL*³(balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

[L06 to R06]

LOUD*¹(loudness)

Boost low and high frequencies to produce

a well-balanced sound at low volume level.

[LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]

Ex.: When “DIMMER” is selected

SUB.W*⁴(subwoofer)

Adjust the subwoofer output level. [00 to 08]

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other

PSM items if necessary.

VOL (volume)

Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*⁵]

5 Finish the procedure.

When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,

the adjustment you have made is stored for

the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)

including “USER.”

If you are using a two-speaker system, set the

fader level to “00.”

This adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer

output.

This takes effect only when a subwoofer is

connected.

Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to

“WOOFER” (see page 13).

Depending on the amplifier gain control

setting. (See page 13 for details.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indications

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DEMO

DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated

Display

demonstration

automatically if no operation is done for about 20 seconds,

[6].

DEMO OFF : Cancels.

1 – 12, [6]

[Initial: 1 (1:00)]

CLOCK H

Hour adjustment

00 – 59, [6]

[Initial: 00 (1:00)]

CLOCK M

Minute adjustment

DIMMER

Dimmer

OFF

: Dims the display illumination of this unit.

: [Initial]; Cancels.

SCROLL*⁶

Scroll

ONCE

AUTO

OFF

: [Initial]; Scrolls the disc information once.

: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).

: Cancels.

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless

of the setting.

WOOFER*⁷

Subwoofer cutoff

frequency

LOW

MID

: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

: [Initial]; Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the

subwoofer.

HIGH

: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

EXT IN*⁸

CHANGER : [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [8], an Apple iPod or a

External input

JVC D. player, [14].

: To use any other external component than the above, [16].

EXT IN

When connecting the amplifier or subwoofer, set this correctly.

L/O MODE

Line output mode

REAR

: [Initial]; Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used

for connecting the speakers through an external amplifier.

WOOFER : Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for

connecting a subwoofer through an external amplifier.

TAG DISP

TAG ON

: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/

Tag display

WMA tracks, [10].

TAG OFF : Cancels.

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.

LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of

the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from being

damaged.)

AMP GAIN

Amplifier gain

control

HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”

Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, or DISC.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 11 and 12.)

• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or

D. player is deactivated.

iPod®/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod

or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

To pause*¹or

stop*²playback

To resume

playback, press it

again.

• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for

controlling an iPod.

• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for

controlling a D. player.

To fast-forward or

reverse the track

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

with the interface adapter.

To go to the next

or previous tracks

For iPod

For D. player

Caution:

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the

vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting

or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

Preparations:

Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the

external input setting, see page 13.

Now the 5/∞/4 /¢

buttons

work as the menu selecting buttons*³.

2 Select the desired menu.

Playback starts automatically from

where it has been paused*¹or stopped*²

previously.

For iPod:

PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS

Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the

beginning)

Adjust the volume.

For D. player:

PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE

Ô TRACK Ô (back to the beginning)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Confirm the selection.

Random play

To move back to the previous

menu, press 5.

ALBM RND*⁴

Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of

the iPod.

• If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.

• If the selected item has another layer, you

will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3

until the desired track is played.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of the

iPod or “Random Play On” of the D. player.

• Holding 4 /¢

items at a time.

can skip 10

RND OFF

Cancels.

The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

If no operations are done for about

For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in

“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”

–

5 seconds.

–

When you confirm the selection of a track.

To check the other information while

listening to an iPod or a D. player

Selecting the playback modes

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

ONE RPT

Functions the same as “Repeat One” of

the iPod or “Repeat Mode One” for the

D. player.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as “Repeat All” of the

iPod or “Repeat Mode All” for the D. player.

RPT OFF

Cancels.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other external component Maintenance

operations

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the

connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe

the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth

moistened with alcohol, being careful not to

damage the connectors.

You can connect an external component to

the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line

Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX

Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

For listening to the iPod or D. player, refer to

pages 14 and 15.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the

CD player in the following cases:

If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 13

and select the external input (“EXT IN”).

• After starting the heater in the car.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the CD player may

malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and

leave the unit turned on for a few hours until

the moisture evaporates.

Turn on the connected component

and start playing the source.

Adjust the volume.

How to handle discs

Center holder

When removing a disc from

its case, press down the center

holder of the case and lift the

disc out, holding it by the edges.

• Always hold the disc by the

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 11 and 12.)

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert

the disc around the center holder (with the

printed surface facing up).

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after

use.

To check the other information while

listening to an external component

Clock Ô EXT IN

To keep discs clean

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it

with a soft cloth in a straight line

from center to edge.

• Do not use any solvent (for example,

conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,

benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Disc operations

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough

spots around the inner and outer

edges. If such a disc is used, this

unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with

a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does

not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital

Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-

DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may

not be recommended.

General

Do not use the following discs:

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/

CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),

MP3 and WMA formats.

• When a disc has been loaded, selecting

“DISC” for the playback source starts disc

play.

Warped disc

Sticker

Sticker residue

Stick-on label

Inserting a disc

• When a disc is inserted upside down, the disc

automatically ejects.

• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and

unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into

the loading slot.

More about this unit

Basic operations

Turning on the power

• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn

on the power. If the source is ready, playback

also starts.

Playing a disc

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3

or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent

sounds.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

Turning off the power

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can play back only files of the same

type which are first detected if a disc includes

both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/

WMA files.

• If you turn off the power while listening to a

disc, disc play will start from where playback

has been stopped previously, next time you

turn on the power.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs;

however, unclosed sessions will be skipped

while playing.

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play

back on this unit because of their disc

characteristics, or for the following reasons:

– Discs are dirty or scratched.

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens

inside the unit.

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

• During SSM search...

– All previously stored stations are erased and

stations are stored newly.

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

– When SSM is over, the station stored in

No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the

previously preset station is erased when a new

station is stored in the same preset number.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are

written with “Packet Write” method.

– There are improper recording conditions

(missing data, etc.) or media conditions

(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time

since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than

that of regular CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective

seal stuck to the surface.

– Discs on which labels can be directly

printed by an ink jet printer.

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR

(variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy

in elapsed time display, and do not show

the actual elapsed time. Especially, after

performing the search function, this

difference becomes noticeable.

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of

200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and

MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate

format.

Using these discs under high temperatures or

high humidities may cause malfunctions or

damage to the unit.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

– WMA files which are not based upon

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>

(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums,

artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,

2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA

files.

• This unit can display only one-byte

characters. No other characters can be

correctly displayed.

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

Changing the source

• If you change the source, playback also stops

(without ejecting the disc).

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

meeting the conditions below:

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps

Next time you select “DISC” for the playback

source, disc play starts from where it has been

stopped previously.

– Sampling frequency:

Ejecting a disc

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,

Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

• The maximum number of characters for file/

folder names vary among the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo: up to 128 characters

– Joliet: up to 64 characters

– Windows long file name: up to 128

characters

• If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted

again into the loading slot to protect it from

dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

General settings—PSM

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the

volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the

unit automatically changes the volume level to

“VOL 30.”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

iPod or D. player operations

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player,

some operations may not be performed

correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the

following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D. player is charged through this unit.

• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all

operations from the iPod or D. player are

disabled. Perform all operations from this

unit.

• If the text information includes more than

8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see

also page 13). This unit can display up to 40

characters.

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service

center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the

speakers.

• The unit does not work at all.

• SSM automatic presetting does not

work.

• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

Store stations manually.

• Static noise while listening to the radio. Connect the antenna firmly.

• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back. • Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component

skipped.

which you used for recording.

• Unlock the disc (see page 10).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Disc can be neither played back nor

ejected.

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.

• Check the cords and connections.

Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in

the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,

Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

the file names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not

add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• A longer readout time is required

(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the

display).

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.

• Tracks do not play back in the order

you have intended them to play.

• Elapsed playing time is not correct.

Playback order is determined when the files are

recorded.

This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused

by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.

Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• “NO FILES” appears on the display.

• Correct characters are not displayed

(e.g. album name).

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

This unit can only display letters (upper case),

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.

Insert a disc into the magazine.

• “NO MAG” appears on the display.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Insert the magazine.

Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly

and press the reset button of the CD changer.

Press the reset button of the CD changer.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

• The CD changer does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• The iPod or D. player does not turn

on or does not work.

• Check the connecting cable and its connection.

• Update the firmware version.

•

Change the battery.

• Buttons do not work as intended.

• The sound is distorted.

The functions of the buttons have been changed.

Press MODE before performing the operation.

Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the

iPod/D. player.

• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.

the display.

• Playback stops.

The headphones are disconnected during

playback. Restart the playback operation using the

control panel (see page 14).

• No sound can be heard when

connecting an iPod nano.

Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.

• No sound can be heard.

Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,

connect it again.

• “ERROR 01” appears on the display

when connecting a D. player.

• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”

appears on the display.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or

D. player.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and

iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.

Check the connection between the adapter and

this unit.

• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.

not work after disconnecting from

this unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

CD PLAYER SECTION

Maximum Power Output:

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical

pickup (semiconductor laser)

Front: 50 W per channel

Rear: 50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz

to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%

total harmonic distortion.

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Dynamic Range:

96 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit

MP3 Decoding Format:

Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz

to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%

total harmonic distortion.

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Tone Control Range:

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding

Bass:

10 dB at 100 Hz

Format:

Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps

GENERAL

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System: Negative ground

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Other Terminal: CD changer

Dimensions (W × H × D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm

Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm

Mass (approx.):

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

[FM Tuner]

1.4 kg (excluding accessories)

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

Design and specifications are subject to change

without notice.

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 30 dB

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States

and/or other countries.

Capture Ratio: 1.5 dB

[AM Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 μV

Selectivity: 35 dB

• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

EN, TH

1105DTSMDTJEIN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KD-G425

Installation/Connection Manual

°“√µ¥µß/§¡Õ°“√µ¥µß

GET0350-006A

[U/UH]

1105DTSMDTJEIN

EN, TH

ENGLISH

‰∑¬

™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π‰¥√∫°“√ÕÕ°·∫∫¡“‡æÕ„™ß“π°∫√–∫∫ °√–· ‰øø“ “¬¥π¢«≈∫°√–· µ√ß 12 ‚«≈∑ À“°√∂¬πµ¢Õß§ÿ≥‰¡‰

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does

not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

¥„™√–∫∫π µÕß„™‡§√Õß·ª≈ß°√–· ‰ø™«¬ ´ß “¡“√∂À“´Õ‰¥®“°√“π¢“¬‡§√Õß‡ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC

§”‡µÕπ

WARNINGS

‡æÕªÕß°π°“√‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√¢Õ·π–π”„Àª≈¥¢«·∫µ‡µÕ√≈∫ÕÕ°·≈«®ßµÕ “¬‰ø°Õπµ¥µß‡§√Õß

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all

electrical connections before installing the unit.

• µ√«® Õ∫„À·π„®«“‰¥‡¥π “¬¥πµÕ√–À«“ß‡§√Õß°∫µ«∂ß √∂¬πµ„À¡·≈«À≈ß®“°µ¥µß

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.

À¡“¬‡Àµ

ÿ:

Notes:

• „™æ°¥®”‡æ“–·∑πø« À“°ø« ¢“¥∫Õ¬ „Àª√°…“√“ π¢“¬‡§√Õß‡ ¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio

dealer.

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at

the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than

50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 13 of the

INSTRUCTIONS).

• ¢Õ·π–π”„ÀµÕ≈”‚æß ∑¡°”≈ß¢∫ ß

∂“°”≈ß¢∫µ”°«“ 50 W „À‡ª≈¬π§“ “AMP GAIN” ‡æÕªÕß°π‰¡„À≈”‚æß™”√

• °“√ªÕß°π°“√≈¥«ß®√ ®–µÕßæπ¢« “¬µ–°« ∑‰¡„™·≈«¥«¬‡∑ ªæπ “¬‰ø

• ·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ®–√Õπ¡“°À≈ß®“°„™ √–¡¥√–«ßÕ¬“‰ª ¡º ‡¡Õ∂Õ¥™¥ª√–°Õ∫π

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

Heat sink

·ºπ√–∫“¬§«“¡√Õπ

¢Õ§«√√–«ß ”À√∫°“√µÕ·À≈ß®“¬°”≈ß·≈–≈”‚æß:

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit

will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in

your car.

•

Õ¬“µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß¢Õß≈”‚æß‡¢“°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ ¡©–ππ ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫®–‰¥√∫§«“¡‡ ¬À“¬¡“°

• °Õπ∑®–µÕ “¬µ–°«‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß¢Õß≈”‚æß‡¢“°∫≈”‚æß „Àµ√«® Õ∫°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø≈”‚æß„π√∂¢Õß§ÿ≥„À‡√¬∫√Õ¬‡ ¬°Õπ

Parts list for installation and connection

The following parts are provided for this unit. After checking them, please set them correctly.

√“¬°“√ «πª√–°Õ∫ ”À√∫µ¥µß·≈–‡™Õ¡µÕ°π

«πª√–°Õ∫µÕ‰ªπ„À¡“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π À≈ß®“°µ√«® Õ∫·≈« ª√∫µß‡§√Õß„À∂°µÕß

A / B

Trim plate

Hard case/Control panel

Sleeve

·ºπ‚≈À–¢Õ∫·µß

≈ß∫√√®

ª≈Õ°Àÿ¡

Power cord

“¬‡§‡∫≈°”≈ß

Washer (ø5)

ª√–‡°π«ß·À«π (ø5)

Lock nut (M5)

πÕµ≈Õ§(M5)

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)

≈°µ¥ (M5 × 20 ¡¡.)

^R¬“^uß^b°^bπ^e°^r√^c–^u·^s∑^hi°^on

^H§π^a∫^ndß§^le∫^s

^B·∫^atµ^te‡µ^ryÕ√

Remote controller

√‚¡µ§Õπ‚∑√≈

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

°“√µ¥µß (°“√ª√–°Õ∫·ºßÀπ“ª∑¡‡¢“)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information

regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

¿“æµ«Õ¬“ßµÕ‰ªπ· ¥ß∂ß°“√µ¥µß·∫∫∑«‰ª À“°§

¬ß√∂¬πµ JVC ¢Õß∑“πÀ√Õ∫√…

• ™¥ª√–°Õ∫ ∂“§≥‰¡·π„®«“µ¥µß™

Do the required electrical connections.

µÕ “¬‰øµ“¡∑°”Àπ¥‰«∑ßÀ¡¥

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

ßÕ·ºπ‡æÕ¬¥ª≈Õ°„ÀµÕ°π‡¢“∑

When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

*¹‡¡Õ§

ÿ≥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫¢π √–«ßÕ¬“∑”„Àø« ∫√‡«≥ «π∑“¬‡ ¬À“¬

Removing the unit

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

°“√∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫

°Õπ®–∂Õ¥™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ „Àª≈¥Àπ“µ¥ «π∑“¬°Õπ

Insert the two handles, then pull them as

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

„ §π∫ß§∫2 Õπ≈ß„π√Õß ”À√∫„™æπ≈«¥¥ß¿“æ®“°ππ

„À‡≈Õπ™

ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫ÕÕ°„π¢≥–∑§Õ¬Ê¥ß§π∫ß§∫∑ß Õß

ÕπÕÕ°®“°°π

When using the optional stay / ‡¡Õ„™µ«¬¥·∫∫‡≈Õ°‰¥

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ‡¡Õµ¥µß™

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

Fire wall

Stay (option)

ºπß°π‰ø

µ«¬¥ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)

µ«Õ¬“ß‡™π „π√∂¬πµ‚µ‚¬µ“ „À∂Õ¥«∑¬ÿµ¥√∂¬πµÕÕ°°Õπ ·≈«®ßµ¥µß‡§√Õßπ‡¢“·∑π∑

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*²

*²Not supplied for this unit.

^*²‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π

^D·º^aß^shÀ^bπ^o“^aª^r∑^d¡

Bracket*²

·∑π√Õß√∫*²

Screw (option)

°√ (‡≈Õ°‰¥)

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

°√À«‡√¬∫ (M5 × 8 ¡¡.)*²

^P°–^o‡^cª^k“^e–^t

Bracket*²

·∑π√Õß√∫*²

Install the unit at an angle of less

than 30˚.

Note

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are

used, they could damage the unit.

µ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫∑¡ÿ¡µ”°«“ 30˚ Õß»“

À¡“¬‡Àµ

‡¡Õµ¥µß™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫≈ß„π·∑π√Õß√∫‰« „À„™ °√¬“«¢π“¥ 8 ¡¡. ∂“„™ °√¬“«°«“πÕ“®∑”„À™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫‡ ¬À“¬‰¥

°“√µ√«® Õ∫ª≠À“¢¥¢Õß

TROUBLESHOOTING

• The fuse blows.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• ø« ¢“¥

* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ¥”·≈– ·¥ßÕ¬“ß∂°µÕßÀ√Õ‰¡

• Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

• ‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õß‰¥

* ¡°“√‡™Õ¡ “¬µ–°« ‡À≈ÕßÀ√Õ‰¡

• No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• ‰¡¡‡ ¬ßÕÕ°®“°≈”‚æß

* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æß‡°¥‰øø“≈¥«ß®√À√Õ‰¡

• Sound is distorted.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

• ‡ ¬ß‡æ¬π

* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ß¥πÀ√Õ‰¡

* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æß¥“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

• ‡ ¬ß√∫°«π

* ¡°“√„™ “¬ πÊ À√ÕÀπ“Ê µÕ®“°‡§√Õß «π∑µ¥µß ‰«∫πæπ¥“πÀ≈ß°∫µ«∂ß√∂¬πµÀ√Õ‰¡

• This unit becomes hot.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• ™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫√Õπ¢π

* “¬µ–°« «π∑ÕÕ°∑“ß≈”‚æßµÕ≈ß¥πÀ√Õ‰¡

* “¬¢«≈∫ “–” ¢Õß≈”‚æß¥“π´“¬·≈–¢«“µÕ≈ß¥πµ“¡ª°µÀ√Õ‰¡

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

• ‡§√Õß√∫π∑”ß“π‰¡

* ∑“π‰¥µß‡§√Õß„À¡·≈«À√Õ¬ß

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENGLISH

‰∑¬

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

°“√‡™Õ¡‚¥¬„™‰øø“

Typical connections / °“√‡™Õ¡µÕ·∫∫ª°µ

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious

damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

°Õ•∑”°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ: µ•«®†Õ•°“•‡¥•†“¬‰ø„•••¬•µÕ¬“ß•–¡¥•–«Õ¬“„Àº¥æ•“¥„•°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕ™

°“•‡™•Õ¡µÕº¥æ•“¥Õ“®∑”„À‡°¥§«“¡‡†¬À“¬•“¬·•ß°•™ÿ¥ª•–

°Õ••‰¥“•µ–°«¢Õß†“¬‰ø ·•–¢ÕßÕ

1 µÕ “¬‰ø µ“¡≈”¥∫∑√–∫„π√ª¥“π≈“ß

2 ‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫“¬Õ“°“»

¥∑“¬ µÕ «π§«∫§ÿ¡°“√‡¥π “¬‰ø‡¢“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫™ÿ¥π

ÿª°••µÕ‡™•Õ¡®“°µ«• ß••Õ“®¡ ∑‰¡‡À¡•Õ•°

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

To external components (see diagram

)

™Õß‡ ¬∫µÕ¢ÕßÕÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ° (¥·ºπ¿¡ )

Rear ground

terminal

®ÿ¥‡™Õ¡µÕ

“¬¥π¥“πÀ≈ß

15 A fuse

ø« ¢π“¥ 15 A

Antenna terminal

Line out (see diagram

)

¢« “¬Õ“°“»

“¬ÕÕ° (¥·ºπ¿¡ )

Ignition switch

Not supplied for this unit.

*¹‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π

«∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥

Black

¥”

To metallic body or chassis of the car

µÕ°∫‚§√ß‚≈À–À√Õ‡™ ´ ¢Õß√∂¬πµ

Yellow *²

‡À≈Õß*²

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery

(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

µÕ°∫¢«∑¡°√–· ‰øø“„π·ºßø« ´ßµÕ°∫·∫µ‡µÕ√√∂¬πµ

(‚¥¬‰¡µÕß„™ «∑™®ÿ¥√–‡∫¥) (12 ‚«≈∑§ß∑)

Fuse block

·ºßø«

Red

·¥ß

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

µÕ°∫¢« «πª√–°Õ∫„π·ºßø«

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to

installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise

power cannot be turned on.

*²°Õπ°“√µ√«® Õ∫°“√∑”ß“π¢Õß™

ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π°Õπ∑®–µ¥µß

µÕßµÕ “¬µ–°«π°Õπ ¡©–ππ®–‰¡ “¡“√∂‡ª¥‡§√Õß‰¥

Blue

»ø“

To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)

‡ “Õ“°“»‰øø“Õµ‚π¡µ À“°¡ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 250 mA)

Blue with white stripe

π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)

)

µÕ‡¢“°∫Õª°√≥Õπ (¢π“¥ ß ¥ 200 mA

White with black stripe

Gray with black stripe

Gray

Green with black stripe

Green

Purple with black stripe

Purple

White

¢“«·∂∫¥”

‡∑“·∂∫¥”

‡∑“

‡¢¬«·∂∫¥”

‡¢¬«

¡«ß·∂∫¥”

¡«ß

¢“«

Left speaker (front)

Right speaker (front)

Left speaker (rear)

Right speaker (rear)

≈”‚æß´“¬ (Àπ“)

≈”‚æß¢«“ (Àπ“)

≈”‚æß´“¬ (À≈ß)

≈”‚æß¢«“ (À≈ß)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer / µÕ·Õ¡ª≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√À√Õ´∫«ø‡øÕ√¥“ππÕ

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it

can be controlled through this unit.

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker

leads of this unit unused.

§ÿ≥ “¡“√∂µÕ°∫·Õ¡æ≈ø“¬‡ÕÕ√ ‡æÕ‡æ¡§ÿ≥ ¿“æ‡ ¬ß„À°∫√–∫∫ ‡µÕ√‚Õ¢Õß√∂¬πµ

• µÕ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈ ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«) ‡¢“°∫ “¬µ–°«√–¬–‰°≈¢ÕßÕ

ÿ¡‚¥¬™ÿ¥ª√–

°Õ∫π‰¥

• ∂Õ¥≈”‚æßÕÕ°®“°™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π ·≈«µÕ‡¢“°∫‡§√Õß¢¬“¬ ∑ß “¬µ–°«≈”‚æß¢Õß™ÿ

Remote lead

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

¢ÕµÕ√ªµ« Y (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)

“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°•

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic

antenna if any

Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

µß§“ “L/O MODE” ‡ªπ “REAR” (¥Àπ“ 13 §”·π–π”)

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

“¬µ–°«•–¬–‰°• ( π”‡ßπ≈“¬¢“«)

µÕ “¬°∫Õÿª°√≥ÕπÀ√Õ‡ “Õ“°“»Õµ‚π¡µ∂“¡

You can connect a power amplifier for rear speakers.

∑“π “¡“√∂µÕ‡§√Õß¢¬“¬‡ ¬ß‡ªπ≈”‚æßÀ≈ß‰¥

JVC Amplifier

‡§√Õß¢¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC

Rear speakers

≈”‚æßÀ≈ß

Front speakers

≈”‚æßÀπ“

Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

µß§“ “L/O MODE” ‡ªπ “WOOFER” (¥Àπ“ 13 §”·π–π”)

You can also connect a subwoofer to the REAR LINE OUT terminals.

∑“π¬ß “¡“√∂µÕ´∫«ø‡øÕ√‡¢“°∫™ÕßµÕ ≠≠“≥ REAR LINE OUT ‰¥

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with

paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage

to the unit.

JVC Amplifier

‡§√Õß¢¬“¬‡ ¬ß JVC

Subwoofer

µÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π„À·ππ‡¢“°∫µ«∂ß‡À≈° À√Õµ«∂ß√∂—µ√ß «π ∑‰¡¡ ‡§≈Õ∫ (À“°¡ ‡§≈Õ∫Õ¬ „À¢¥ ÕÕ°°Õπ

°ÕπµÕ≈«¥ “¬¥π) À“°‰¡ªØ∫µµ“¡§”·π–π”π ‡§√ÕßÕ“®™”√ÿ¥À√Õ‡ ¬À“¬‰¥

´∫«ø‡øÕ√

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

*⁴“¬‡§‡∫≈ ≠≠“≥ (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)

C ^{Connecting the external components /}°“√µÕ‡æ¡‡µ¡‡¢“°∫Õ

ÿª°√≥ÕπÊ

CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD ‡™π‡®Õ√, Apple iPod® À√Õ‡§√Õß‡≈π JVC D.

• Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

µß§“ “CHANGER” ‡ªπ°“√§“√∫ ≠≠“≥Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ° (¥Àπ“ 13 §”·π–π”)

You can connect these components as illustrated below.

∑“π “¡“√∂µÕÕÿª°√≥¥ß°≈“«µ“¡¿“æ· ¥ß¥“π≈“ß

The iPod*⁵or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for

∑“π “¡“√∂‡™Õ¡µÕ iPod*⁵À√Õ‡§√Õß‡≈π D. ‚¥¬„™Õπ‡∑Õ√‡ø Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√ (‰¡¡¡“„À)—KS-PD100

( ”À√∫ iPod) À√Õ KS-PD500 ( ”À√∫‡§√Õß‡≈π D.)

iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

CAUTION / ¢Õ§«√√–«ß:

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

^{Apple iPod}(·¬°®”Àπ“¬)

• °Õπ®–‡™Õ¡µÕ°∫Õ

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

À√Õ

‡§√Õß‡≈π JVC D. (·¬°®”Àπ“¬)

JVC CD changer

JVC CD ‡™π‡®Õ√

CD changer jack

™Õß‡ ¬∫µÕ¢Õß

‡§√Õß‡≈π ^CD

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer

iPod ‡ªπ‡§√ÕßÀ¡“¬°“√§“¢Õß Apple Computer, Inc. ´ß®¥∑–‡∫¬π°“√§“„πª√–‡∑» À√∞Õ‡¡√°“·≈–ª√–‡∑»ÕπÊ

*⁶µÕ “¬∑„À¡“ ”À√∫ CD ‡™π‡®Õ√

Other external component / Õ

ÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ°ÕπÊ

• Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) /µß§“ “EXT IN” ‡∫ªπ°“√§“√∫ ≠≠“≥Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ° (¥Àπ“ 13 §”·π–π”)

External component

Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ°

CD changer jack

™Õß‡ ¬∫µÕ¢Õß

‡§√Õß‡≈π ^CD

External component

Õÿª°√≥¿“¬πÕ°

Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

*⁷Õ·¥ª‡µÕ√ “¬ ≠≠“≥‡¢“ KS-U57 (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™

ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

¢«‡ ¬∫¡π ‡µÕ√‚Õ¢π“¥ 3.5 ¡¡.

*⁸Õ–·¥ª‡µÕ√√∫ ≠≠“≥ AUX √

ÿπ KS-U58 (‰¡‰¥„À¡“°∫™ÿ¥ª√–°Õ∫π)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD RECEIVER

KD-G425

ALAT PENERIMA CD

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.

Untuk membatalkan tampilan demonstrasi, lihat halaman 6.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

Untuk instalasi dan penyambungan, lihat buku pedoman terpisah.

INSTRUCTIONS

BUKU PETUNJUK

GET0350-004A

[UN]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to

obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave

all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.

Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

Warning:

How to forcibly eject a disc

If you need to operate the unit while driving,

be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be

involved in a traffic accident.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

Caution on volume setting:

How to detach/attach the control

panel

Discs produce very little noise compared

with other sources. Lower the volume

before playing a disc to avoid damaging

the speakers by the sudden increase of the

output level.

How to reset your unit

Detaching...

Attaching...

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

• If a disc is loaded, it will eject. Be careful not to

drop the disc.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to read this manual

• Button operations are mainly explained with

the illustrations in the table below.

CONTENTS

• Some related tips and notes are explained in

“More about this unit” (see pages 17 – 19).

Control panel ...................................

Remote controller — ^RM-RK50..............

Getting started.................................

Basic operations....................................................

Press briefly.

Radio operations ..............................

Press repeatedly.

Disc operations.................................

Playing a disc in the unit ......................................

Playing discs in the CD changer ............................

Press either

one.

Sound adjustments........................... 11

General settings — PSM ................... 12

iPod®/D. player operations ................ 14

Other external component operations... 16

Maintenance .................................... 16

More about this unit ......................... 17

Troubleshooting............................... 19

Specifications................................... 21

Press and hold until your

desired response begins.

Press and hold both

buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations.

: Indicator displayed for the

corresponding operation.

How to use the MODE button

If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions

mode, then the number buttons and 5/∞

buttons work as different function buttons.

Ex.: When number button 2 works as

MO (monaural) button.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as

this will block outside sounds, making driving

dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any

complicated operations.

Time countdown indicator

Temperature inside the car...

To use these buttons for their original

functions again after pressing MODE, wait for

5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons

until the functions mode is cleared or press

MODE again.

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot

or cold weather, wait until the temperature in

the car becomes normal before operating the

unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control panel

Parts identification

Display window

1 4 /¢

buttons

Display window

a Disc information indicators—TAG (ID3

(standby/on attenuator) button

3 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

4 Loading slot

5 Display window

6 0 (eject) button

7 EQ (equalizer) button

8 Remote sensor

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong

light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

9 SRC (source) button

p BAND button

Tag),

(folder),

(track/file)

s Disc type indicators—WMA, MP3

d Playback source indicators—

CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is

selected as the playback source.

DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player.

f Playback mode / item indicators—

RND (random),

RPT (repeat)

g LOUD (loudness) indicator

h EQ (equalizer) indicator

j Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)

indicators—JAZZ, CLASSIC, HIP HOP,

POPS, ROCK, USER

(disc),

(folder),

q Control dial

w SEL (select) button

e MO (monaural) button

r SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

button

k Tr (track) indicator

l Source display / Volume level indicator

/ Main display

z Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),

MO (monaural)

t Number buttons

y RPT (repeat) button

u RND (random) button

i MODE button

o DISP (display) button

;

(control panel release) button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Main elements and features

Remote controller —

RM-RK50

Installing the lithium coin battery

(CR2025)

(standby/on/attenuator) button

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is

on.

Aim the remote controller directly at the

remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is

no obstacle in between.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons

• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.

• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA

discs.

Warning:

• Do not install any battery other than

CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may

explode.

• Store the battery in a place where children

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,

cracking, or starting a fire:

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble,

heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

– Do not leave the battery with other

metallic materials.

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or

similar tools.

• While playing an MP3 disc on an

MP3-compatible CD changer:

– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

– Changes the folder if pressed and held.

• While listening to an Apple iPod or a

JVC D. player:

– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with

D ∞.

– Enters the main menu with 5 U.

(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the

menu selecting buttons.)*

3 VOL – / VOL + buttons

• Adjusts the volume level.

4 SOUND button

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate

when throwing away or saving it.

• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom

equalizer).

5 SOURCE button

Caution:

• Selects the source.

* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.

D ∞ : Confirms the selection.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if

pressed and held.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 11 and 12.)

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

• While listening to an iPod or a D. player

(in menu selecting mode):

– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,

press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)

– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and

held.

To drop the volume in a

moment (ATT)

To restore the sound, press

it again.

To turn off the power

Getting started

Basic settings

Basic operations

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages

12 and 13.

Turn on the power.

1 Canceling the display

demonstrations

* You cannot select these sources if they

are not ready or not connected.

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”

2 Setting the clock

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust

the hour.

⁄

For FM/AM tuner

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then

adjust the minute.

3 Finish the procedure.

Adjust the volume.

To check the current clock

time when the power is

turned off

Volume level appears.

Volume level indicator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to

receive

Radio operations

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be

lost.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO

indicator goes off.

Selected band appears.

Start searching for a station.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential

Memory)

When a station is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

want to store into.

2 Select a desired station frequency.

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when

automatic presetting is over.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically in the FM

band.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset

Disc operations

number 4 of the FM1 band.

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you

change the source or eject the disc.

Preset number flashes for a while.

To stop play and eject the

disc

Listening to a preset station

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you

want.

* If you have changed the external input

setting to “EXT IN” (see page 13), you

cannot select the CD changer.

Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 – 06:

To check the other information while

listening to an FM or AM station

For disc number from 07 – 12:

Clock Ô Frequency

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About MP3 and WMA discs

To go to the next or previous folders (only for

MP3 or WMA discs)

MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and

“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded

in “folders.”

For MP3 discs:

For WMA discs:

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.

• You can also connect other CH-X series CD

changers (except CH-X99 and CH-X100).

These units are not compatible with MP3

discs.

• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD

changer.

• You cannot use the KD-MK series CD

changers with this unit.

• Disc text information recorded in the CD

Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text

compatible CD changer is connected.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly

To select a number from 01 – 06:

To select a number from 07 – 12:

To fast-forward or reverse the track

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA

discs, it is required that folders are assigned

with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their

folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

To go to the next or previous tracks

To select a particular track in a folder (for

MP3 or WMA discs):

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other main functions

Changing the display information

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks

within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks

whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

While playing an MP3 or a WMA^*²disc

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”

(see page 13)

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”

: Clock with the current track number

Each time you press the button, you can

skip 10 tracks.

• After the last track, the first track will be

selected and vice versa.

: Elapsed playing time with the current

track number

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

If the current disc is an audio CD,

“NO NAME” appears.

Only for the built-in CD player.

If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag

information, folder name and file name

appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will

not light up.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting the playback modes

Sound adjustments

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to

the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

You can use only one of the following playback

modes at a time.

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

Ex.: When “ROCK” is selected

Mode

Plays repeatedly

Preset values

BAS

TRE

LOUD

TRK RPT

: The current track.

(bass) (treble) (loudness)

Indication (For)

FLDR RPT*⁴: All tracks of the current

folder.

USER

OFF

DISC RPT*⁵: All tracks of the current disc.

(Flat sound)

ROCK

+03

+01

+04

+02

+01

–02

+01

RPT OFF

: Cancels.

(Rock or disco music)

Random play

CLASSIC

OFF

(Classical music)

POPS

Mode

Plays at random

(Light music)

FLDR RND*⁴: All tracks of the current

folder, then tracks of the next

folder and so on.

HIP HOP

(Funk or rap music)

JAZZ

DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.

+03

OFF

(Jazz music)

MAG RND*⁵: All tracks of the inserted

discs.

RND OFF : Cancels.

Adjusting the sound

Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your

preference.

disc.

Only while playing discs in the CD

changer.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General settings — PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)

items listed in the table that follows.

Indication [Range]

BAS*¹(bass)

Adjust the bass. [–06 to +06]

2 Select a PSM item.

TRE*¹(treble)

Adjust the treble. [–06 to +06]

FAD*²(fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

[R06 to F06]

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.

BAL*³(balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

[L06 to R06]

LOUD*¹(loudness)

Boost low and high frequencies to produce

a well-balanced sound at low volume level.

[LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]

Ex.: When “DIMMER” is selected

SUB.W*⁴(subwoofer)

Adjust the subwoofer output level. [00 to 08]

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other

PSM items if necessary.

VOL (volume)

Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*⁵]

5 Finish the procedure.

When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,

the adjustment you have made is stored for

the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)

including “USER.”

If you are using a two-speaker system, set the

fader level to “00.”

This adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer

output.

This takes effect only when a subwoofer is

connected.

Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to

“WOOFER” (see page 13).

Depending on the amplifier gain control

setting. (See page 13 for details.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indications

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DEMO

DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated

Display

demonstration

automatically if no operation is done for about 20 seconds,

[6].

DEMO OFF : Cancels.

1 – 12, [6]

[Initial: 1 (1:00)]

CLOCK H

Hour adjustment

00 – 59, [6]

[Initial: 00 (1:00)]

CLOCK M

Minute adjustment

DIMMER

Dimmer

OFF

: Dims the display illumination of this unit.

: [Initial]; Cancels.

SCROLL*⁶

Scroll

ONCE

AUTO

OFF

: [Initial]; Scrolls the disc information once.

: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).

: Cancels.

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless

of the setting.

WOOFER*⁷

Subwoofer cutoff

frequency

LOW

MID

: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

: [Initial]; Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the

subwoofer.

HIGH

: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

EXT IN*⁸

CHANGER : [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [8], an Apple iPod or a

External input

JVC D. player, [14].

: To use any other external component than the above, [16].

EXT IN

When connecting the amplifier or subwoofer, set this correctly.

L/O MODE

Line output mode

REAR

: [Initial]; Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used

for connecting the speakers through an external amplifier.

WOOFER : Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for

connecting a subwoofer through an external amplifier.

TAG DISP

TAG ON

: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/

Tag display

WMA tracks, [10].

TAG OFF : Cancels.

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.

LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of

the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from being

damaged.)

AMP GAIN

Amplifier gain

control

HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”

Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, or DISC.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 11 and 12.)

• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or

D. player is deactivated.

iPod®/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod

or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

To pause*¹or

stop*²playback

To resume

playback, press it

again.

• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for

controlling an iPod.

• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for

controlling a D. player.

To fast-forward or

reverse the track

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

with the interface adapter.

To go to the next

or previous tracks

For iPod

For D. player

Caution:

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the

vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting

or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

Preparations:

Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the

external input setting, see page 13.

Now the 5/∞/4 /¢

buttons

work as the menu selecting buttons*³.

2 Select the desired menu.

Playback starts automatically from

where it has been paused*¹or stopped*²

previously.

For iPod:

PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS

Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the

beginning)

Adjust the volume.

For D. player:

PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE

Ô TRACK Ô (back to the beginning)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Confirm the selection.

Random play

To move back to the previous

menu, press 5.

ALBM RND*⁴

Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of

the iPod.

• If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.

• If the selected item has another layer, you

will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3

until the desired track is played.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of the

iPod or “Random Play On” of the D. player.

• Holding 4 /¢

items at a time.

can skip 10

RND OFF

Cancels.

The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

If no operations are done for about

For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in

“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”

–

5 seconds.

–

When you confirm the selection of a track.

To check the other information while

listening to an iPod or a D. player

Selecting the playback modes

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

ONE RPT

Functions the same as “Repeat One” of

the iPod or “Repeat Mode One” for the

D. player.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as “Repeat All” of the

iPod or “Repeat Mode All” for the D. player.

RPT OFF

Cancels.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other external component Maintenance

operations

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the

connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe

the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth

moistened with alcohol, being careful not to

damage the connectors.

You can connect an external component to

the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line

Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX

Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

For listening to the iPod or D. player, refer to

pages 14 and 15.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the

CD player in the following cases:

If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 13

and select the external input (“EXT IN”).

• After starting the heater in the car.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the CD player may

malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and

leave the unit turned on for a few hours until

the moisture evaporates.

Turn on the connected component

and start playing the source.

Adjust the volume.

How to handle discs

Center holder

When removing a disc from

its case, press down the center

holder of the case and lift the

disc out, holding it by the edges.

• Always hold the disc by the

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 11 and 12.)

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert

the disc around the center holder (with the

printed surface facing up).

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after

use.

To check the other information while

listening to an external component

Clock Ô EXT IN

To keep discs clean

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it

with a soft cloth in a straight line

from center to edge.

• Do not use any solvent (for example,

conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,

benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Disc operations

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough

spots around the inner and outer

edges. If such a disc is used, this

unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with

a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does

not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital

Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-

DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may

not be recommended.

General

Do not use the following discs:

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/

CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),

MP3 and WMA formats.

• When a disc has been loaded, selecting

“DISC” for the playback source starts disc

play.

Warped disc

Sticker

Sticker residue

Stick-on label

Inserting a disc

• When a disc is inserted upside down, the disc

automatically ejects.

• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and

unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into

the loading slot.

More about this unit

Basic operations

Turning on the power

• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn

on the power. If the source is ready, playback

also starts.

Playing a disc

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3

or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent

sounds.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

Turning off the power

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can play back only files of the same

type which are first detected if a disc includes

both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/

WMA files.

• If you turn off the power while listening to a

disc, disc play will start from where playback

has been stopped previously, next time you

turn on the power.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs;

however, unclosed sessions will be skipped

while playing.

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play

back on this unit because of their disc

characteristics, or for the following reasons:

– Discs are dirty or scratched.

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens

inside the unit.

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

• During SSM search...

– All previously stored stations are erased and

stations are stored newly.

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

– When SSM is over, the station stored in

No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the

previously preset station is erased when a new

station is stored in the same preset number.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are

written with “Packet Write” method.

– There are improper recording conditions

(missing data, etc.) or media conditions

(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time

since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than

that of regular CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective

seal stuck to the surface.

– Discs on which labels can be directly

printed by an ink jet printer.

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR

(variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy

in elapsed time display, and do not show

the actual elapsed time. Especially, after

performing the search function, this

difference becomes noticeable.

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of

200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and

MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate

format.

Using these discs under high temperatures or

high humidities may cause malfunctions or

damage to the unit.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

– WMA files which are not based upon

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>

(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums,

artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,

2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA

files.

• This unit can display only one-byte

characters. No other characters can be

correctly displayed.

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

Changing the source

• If you change the source, playback also stops

(without ejecting the disc).

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

meeting the conditions below:

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps

Next time you select “DISC” for the playback

source, disc play starts from where it has been

stopped previously.

– Sampling frequency:

Ejecting a disc

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,

Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

• The maximum number of characters for file/

folder names vary among the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo: up to 128 characters

– Joliet: up to 64 characters

– Windows long file name: up to 128

characters

• If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted

again into the loading slot to protect it from

dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

General settings—PSM

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the

volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the

unit automatically changes the volume level to

“VOL 30.”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

iPod or D. player operations

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player,

some operations may not be performed

correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the

following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D. player is charged through this unit.

• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all

operations from the iPod or D. player are

disabled. Perform all operations from this

unit.

• If the text information includes more than

8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see

also page 13). This unit can display up to 40

characters.

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service

center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the

speakers.

• The unit does not work at all.

• SSM automatic presetting does not

work.

• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

Store stations manually.

• Static noise while listening to the radio. Connect the antenna firmly.

• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back. • Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component

skipped.

which you used for recording.

• Unlock the disc (see page 10).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Disc can be neither played back nor

ejected.

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.

• Check the cords and connections.

Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in

the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,

Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

the file names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not

add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• A longer readout time is required

(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the

display).

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.

• Tracks do not play back in the order

you have intended them to play.

• Elapsed playing time is not correct.

Playback order is determined when the files are

recorded.

This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused

by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.

Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• “NO FILES” appears on the display.

• Correct characters are not displayed

(e.g. album name).

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

This unit can only display letters (upper case),

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.

Insert a disc into the magazine.

• “NO MAG” appears on the display.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Insert the magazine.

Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly

and press the reset button of the CD changer.

Press the reset button of the CD changer.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

• The CD changer does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• The iPod or D. player does not turn

on or does not work.

• Check the connecting cable and its connection.

• Update the firmware version.

•

Change the battery.

• Buttons do not work as intended.

• The sound is distorted.

The functions of the buttons have been changed.

Press MODE before performing the operation.

Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the

iPod/D. player.

• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.

the display.

• Playback stops.

The headphones are disconnected during

playback. Restart the playback operation using the

control panel (see page 14).

• No sound can be heard when

connecting an iPod nano.

Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.

• No sound can be heard.

Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,

connect it again.

• “ERROR 01” appears on the display

when connecting a D. player.

• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”

appears on the display.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or

D. player.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and

iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.

Check the connection between the adapter and

this unit.

• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.

not work after disconnecting from

this unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

CD PLAYER SECTION

Maximum Power Output:

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical

pickup (semiconductor laser)

Front: 50 W per channel

Rear: 50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz

to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%

total harmonic distortion.

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Dynamic Range:

96 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit

MP3 Decoding Format:

Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz

to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%

total harmonic distortion.

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Tone Control Range:

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding

Bass:

10 dB at 100 Hz

Format:

Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps

GENERAL

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System: Negative ground

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Other Terminal: CD changer

Dimensions (W × H × D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm

Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm

Mass (approx.):

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

[FM Tuner]

1.4 kg (excluding accessories)

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

Design and specifications are subject to change

without notice.

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 30 dB

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States

and/or other countries.

Capture Ratio: 1.5 dB

[AM Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 μV

Selectivity: 35 dB

• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Ada MASALAH dengan cara

pengoperasian?

Setel kembali unit Anda

Lihat halaman mengenai Bagaimana mereset unit anda

EN, IN

1105DTSMDTJEIN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KD-G425

Installation/Connection Manual

Manual Pemasangan/Penyambungan

GET0350-009A

[UN]

1105DTSMDTJEIN

EN, IN

ENGLISH

INDONESIA

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does Alat penerima ini didisain untuk beroperasi hanya pada 12 V DC, sistem listrik tanah NEGATIVE. Jika

not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

kendaraan anda tidak memiliki sistem ini, sebuah pembalik tegangan diperlukan, yang mana dapat dibeli

di penyalur-penyalur audio mobil JVC.

WARNINGS

PERINGATAN

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, kami menyarankan anda memutuskan sambungan terminal negatif

electrical connections before installing the unit.

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.

baterai dan membuat semua sambungan-sambungan listrik sebelum memasang alat penerima.

• Pastikan untuk mentanahkan alat penerima ini ke casis mobil kembali setelah pemasangan.

Catatan:

Notes:

• Ganti sekring dengan voltase yang sudah ditetapkan. Jika sekring sering meledak, konsultasikan pada

penyalur audio mobil JVC anda.

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio

dealer.

• Disarankan untuk menghubungkan speaker-speaker dengan maksimum power lebih dari 50 W (keduanya

di belakang dan di depan, dengan sebuah impedansi 4 Ω sampai 8 Ω). Jika maksimum power kurang

dari 50 W, ganti pengaturan “AMP GAIN” (“PENAMBAH PENGUAT”) untuk mencegah speaker-speaker

dari kerusakan (lihat halaman 13 dari BUKU PETUNJUK).

• Untuk mencegah hubungan pendek, tutup ujung-ujung terminal-terminal TIDAK DIGUNAKAN dengan

pita isolasi.

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at

the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than

50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 13 of the

INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

• Pendingin menjadi sangat panas setelah digunakan. Hati-hati untuk tidak menyentuhnya ketika

memindahkan alat penerima ini.

Heat sink

Pendingin

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit

will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in

your car.

TINDAKAN-TINDAKAN PENCEGAHAN pada suplai power dan

sambungan-sambungan speaker:

• JANGAN sambungkan ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke baterai mobil; sebaliknya,

alat penerima tersebut akan secara serius rusak.

• SEBELUM menyambung ujung-ujung speaker dari kabel power ke speaker-speaker, cek perkabelan

speaker dalam mobil anda.

Parts list for installation and connection

Daftar bagian-bagian untuk pemasangan dan penyambungan

The following parts are provided for this unit. After checking them, please set them correctly.

Bagian-bagian berikut disediakan untuk alat penerima ini. Setelah mengecek bagian-bagian tersebut,

silahkan atur bagian-bagian itu.

A / B

Trim plate

Plat rapi

Hard case/Control panel

Kotak keras/Panel kontrol

Sleeve

Selongsong

Power cord

Kabel power

Washer (ø5)

Perapat sambungan (ø5)

Lock nut (M5)

Mur kunci (M5)

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)

Baut bingkai (M5 × 20 mm)

Handles

Pegangan-pegangan

Remote controller

Remote kontrol

Rubber cushion

Bantalan karet

Battery

Baterai

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information

regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

PEMASANGAN (BINGKAI-DALAM DASH)

Ilustrasi berikut menunjukkan sebuah tipe pemasangan. Jika anda mempunyai suatu pertanyaan atau

informasi yang diperlukan mengenai alat-alat pemasangan, konsultasikan pada penyalur audio mobil JVC

atau sebuah perusahaan yang mensuplai alat-alat.

• Jika anda tidak yakin bagaimana memasang alat penerima ini dengan benar, biarkan dipasang dengan

teknisi yang berkualitas.

Do the required electrical connections.

Lakukan penyambungan-penyambungan

listrik yang diperlukan.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

Bengkokkan pengait-pengait yang tepat

untuk menahan selongsong secara kuat

pada tempatnya.

When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

Ketika anda memberdirikan alat penerima, hati-hati untuk tidak merusak sekring di belakang.

Removing the unit

Memindahkan alat penerima

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Sebelum memindahkan alat penerima, lepaskan seksi belakang.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

Sisipkan kedua pemegang dan tarik alat penerima

seperti yang diilustrasikan hingga alat penerima

dapat dipindahkan.

When using the optional stay / Ketika menggunakan

penguat tambahan

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / Ketika memasang alat penerima

tanpa menggunakan selongsong

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

Dalam sebuah kereta Toyota misalnya, pertama pindahkan radio mobil dan pasang alat penerima tersebut ke dalam tempatnya.

Fire wall

Dinding tahan api

Stay (option)

Penguat (tambahan)

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Not supplied for this unit.

Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.

Dashboard

Tempat alat pada

bagian depan

Bracket*²

Breket*²

Screw (option)

Sekrup (tambahan)

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Sekrup-sekrup tipe rata (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Pocket

Kantong

Bracket*²

Breket*²

Install the unit at an angle of less

than 30˚.

Pasang penerima pada suatu sudut

kurang dari 30˚.

Note

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are

used, they could damage the unit.

: Ketika memasang alat penerima pada breket bingkai, pastikan untuk menggunakan sekrup-sekrup panjang–

8 mm. Jika sekrup yang lebih panjang digunakan, maka dapat merusak alat penerima.

Catatan

TROUBLESHOOTING

PEMECAHAN MASALAH

• The fuse blows.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• Sekring meledak.

* Apakah ujung-ujung merah dan hitam tersambung dengan benar?

• Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

• Power tidak dapat dihidupkan.

* Apakah ujung kuning sudah tersambung?

• No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• Tidak ada suara dari speaker.

* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker terhubung pendek?

• Sound is distorted.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• Suara terdistorsi.

* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?

* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?

• Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

• Berisik yang mengganggu suara-suara.

* Apakah terminal tanahan belakang tersambung ke casis mobil menggunakan kabel-kabel terpendek dan

tertebal?

• This unit becomes hot.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• Alat penerima menjadi panas.

* Apakah ujung keluaran speaker sudah ditanahkan?

* Apakah terminal-terminal “–” dari speaker-speaker L dan R sudah ditanahkan secara umum?

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

• Alat penerima ini tidak bekerja secara keseluruhan.

* Apakah anda sudah reset (memasang kembali) alat penerima anda?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENGLISH

INDONESIA

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

SAMBUNGAN-SAMBUNGAN LISTRIK

A ^{Typical connections / Ciri khas sambungan-sambungan}

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious Sebelum penyambungan: Cek perkabelan dalam mobil dengan hati-hati. Penyambungan yang

damage to this unit.

tidak benar mungkin menyebabkan kerusakan serius pada alat penerima.

Ujung dari kabel power dan beberapa konektor dari bodi mobil mungkin berbeda dalam warna.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

1 Sambungkan ujung berwarna dari kabel power dalam urutan spesifikasi pada ilustrasi di bawah.

2 Sambungkan kabel antena.

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

3 Akhirnya sambungkan dudukan kabel ke alat penerima.

To external components (see diagram

Ke komponen eksternal (lihat diagram

)

Rear ground

terminal

Terminal tanah

belakang

15 A fuse

Sekring 15 A

Antenna terminal

Line out (see diagram

)

Terminal antena

Keluaran (lihat diagram

)

Not supplied for this unit.

Tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini.

Ignition switch

Saklar kontak

Black

Hitam

To metallic body or chassis of the car

Ke besi bodi atau casis dari mobil tersebut

Yellow *²

Kuning *²

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery

(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

Ke sebuah tempat terminal dalam blok sekring disambungkan ke baterai

mobil (abaikan saklar kontak) (konstant 12 V)

Fuse block

Blok sekring

Red

Merah

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

Ke sebuah terminal aksesoris dalam blok sekring

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to

installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise

power cannot be turned on.

Sebelum pengecekan pengoperasian dari alat penerima

ini sebelum pemasangan, ujung ini harus sudah

Blue

Biru

dihubungkan, selain itu power tidak dapat dihidupkan.

To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)

Ke antena otomatis jika ada (maksimum 250 mA)

Blue with white stripe

Biru dengan strip putih

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)

Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain (maksimum 200 mA)

White with black stripe

Putih dengan strip hitam

Gray with black stripe

Abu-abu dengan strip

hitam

Gray

Abu-abu

Green with black stripe

Hijau dengan strip hitam

Green

Hijau

Purple with black stripe

Ungu dengan strip hitam

Purple

Ungu

White

Putih

Left speaker (front)

Speaker kiri (depan)

Right speaker (front)

Speaker kanan (depan)

Left speaker (rear)

Speaker kiri (belakang)

Right speaker (rear)

Speaker kanan (belakang)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

B ^{Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer / Penyambungan penguat eksternal atau subwoofer}

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it

can be controlled through this unit.

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker

leads of this unit unused.

Anda dapat menyambungkan penguat-penguat untuk meningkatkan sistem stereo mobil anda.

• Sambungkan ujung jauh (biru dengan strip putih) ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain sehingga dapat

dikontrol melalui alat penerima ini.

• Putuskan sambungan speaker-speaker dari alat penerima ini, sambungkan ini ke penguat.

Biarkan ujung speaker dari alat penerima ini tidak digunakan.

Remote lead

Ujung jauh

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Konektor Y (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic

antenna if any

Ke ujung jauh dari peralatan lain atau antena

Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

Setel “L/O MODE ” ke “REAR ” (Lihat halaman 13 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.

You can connect a power amplifier for rear speakers.

otomatis jika ada

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

Ujung jauh (Biru dengan strip putih)

)

Anda dapat menghubungkan penguat daya untuk pengeras suara bagian

belakang.

JVC Amplifier

Penguat JVC

Rear speakers

Speaker-speaker belakang

Front speakers

Speaker-speaker depan

Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

Setel “L/O MODE ” ke “WOOFER ” (Lihat halaman 13 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.)

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or

to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with

paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before

attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage

to the unit.

Pasangkan dengan kuat kabel tanah ke bodi besi

atau ke casis dari mobil—pada tempat yang tidak

dilapisi cat (jika dilapisi cat, hilangkan cat sebelum

memasang kabel). Kegagalan melakukan ini mungkin

menyebabkan kerusakan pada alat penerima tersebut.

You can also connect a subwoofer to the REAR LINE OUT terminals.

Anda juga dapat menghubungkan subwoofer ke terminal REAR LINE

OUT.

JVC Amplifier

Penguat JVC

Subwoofer

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Kabel sinyal (tidak disediakan untuk alat penerima ini)

C ^{Connecting the external components / Menyambung komponen eksternal}

CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CD changer, Apple iPod® atau JVC D. player

• Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Aturlah “CHANGER” untuk pengaturan input eksternal (Lihat halaman 13 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.

)

You can connect these components as illustrated below.

Anda bisa menyambungkan komponen-komponen ini seperti yang diilustrasikan di bawah.

The iPod*⁵or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for

iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

iPod*⁵atau D. player bisa disambungkan dengan mengunakan adaptor antarmuka (tidak disediakan)—

KS-PD100 (untuk iPod) atau KS-PD500 (untuk D. player).

CAUTION / PERINGATAN:

• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

• Sebelum menyambungkan komponen eksternal, pastikan bahwa alat penerima sudah dimatikan.

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod (dibeli terpisah)

atau

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

JVC D. player (dibeli terpisah)

JVC CD changer

CD changer JVC

CD changer jack

Konektor CD changer

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

iPod adalah merek dagang dari Apple Computer, Inc., terdaftar di A.S. dan di negara-negara lain.

Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer

Penyambung sinyal disediakan untuk CD changer anda

Other external component / Komponen eksternal lainnya

• Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Aturlah “EXT IN” untuk pengaturan input eksternal (Lihat halaman 13 dari BUKU PETUNJUK.)

External component

Komponen eksternal

CD changer jack

Konektor CD changer

External component

Komponen eksternal

Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

Adapter Jalur Masukan KS-U57 (tidak disediakan untuk

alat penerima ini)

AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

Adapter Masukan AUX KS-U58 (tidak disediakan untuk

alat penerima ini)

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

Steker mini stereo 3.5 mm

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD RECEIVER

KD-G425

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

INSTRUCTIONS

GET0350-005A

[UT]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to

obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave

all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.

Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

Warning:

How to forcibly eject a disc

If you need to operate the unit while driving,

be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be

involved in a traffic accident.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

Caution on volume setting:

How to detach/attach the control

panel

Discs produce very little noise compared

with other sources. Lower the volume

before playing a disc to avoid damaging

the speakers by the sudden increase of the

output level.

How to reset your unit

Detaching...

Attaching...

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

• If a disc is loaded, it will eject. Be careful not to

drop the disc.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to read this manual

• Button operations are mainly explained with

the illustrations in the table below.

CONTENTS

• Some related tips and notes are explained in

“More about this unit” (see pages 17 – 19).

Control panel ...................................

Remote controller — ^RM-RK50..............

Getting started.................................

Basic operations....................................................

Press briefly.

Radio operations ..............................

Press repeatedly.

Disc operations.................................

Playing a disc in the unit ......................................

Playing discs in the CD changer ............................

Press either

one.

Sound adjustments........................... 11

General settings — PSM ................... 12

iPod®/D. player operations ................ 14

Other external component operations... 16

Maintenance .................................... 16

More about this unit ......................... 17

Troubleshooting............................... 19

Specifications................................... 21

Press and hold until your

desired response begins.

Press and hold both

buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations.

: Indicator displayed for the

corresponding operation.

How to use the MODE button

If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions

mode, then the number buttons and 5/∞

buttons work as different function buttons.

Ex.: When number button 2 works as

MO (monaural) button.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as

this will block outside sounds, making driving

dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any

complicated operations.

Time countdown indicator

Temperature inside the car...

To use these buttons for their original

functions again after pressing MODE, wait for

5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons

until the functions mode is cleared or press

MODE again.

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot

or cold weather, wait until the temperature in

the car becomes normal before operating the

unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control panel

Parts identification

Display window

1 4 /¢

buttons

Display window

a Disc information indicators—TAG (ID3

(standby/on attenuator) button

3 5 (up) / ∞ (down) buttons

4 Loading slot

5 Display window

6 0 (eject) button

7 EQ (equalizer) button

8 Remote sensor

DO NOT expose the remote sensor to strong

light (direct sunlight or artificial lighting).

9 SRC (source) button

p BAND button

Tag),

(folder),

(track/file)

s Disc type indicators—WMA, MP3

d Playback source indicators—

CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is

selected as the playback source.

DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player.

f Playback mode / item indicators—

RND (random),

RPT (repeat)

g LOUD (loudness) indicator

h EQ (equalizer) indicator

j Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)

indicators—JAZZ, CLASSIC, HIP HOP,

POPS, ROCK, USER

(disc),

(folder),

q Control dial

w SEL (select) button

e MO (monaural) button

r SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

button

k Tr (track) indicator

l Source display / Volume level indicator

/ Main display

z Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),

MO (monaural)

t Number buttons

y RPT (repeat) button

u RND (random) button

i MODE button

o DISP (display) button

;

(control panel release) button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Main elements and features

Remote controller —

RM-RK50

Installing the lithium coin battery

(CR2025)

(standby/on/attenuator) button

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is

on.

Aim the remote controller directly at the

remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is

no obstacle in between.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons

• Changes the FM/AM bands with 5 U.

• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA

discs.

Warning:

• Do not install any battery other than

CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may

explode.

• Store the battery in a place where children

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,

cracking, or starting a fire:

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble,

heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

– Do not leave the battery with other

metallic materials.

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or

similar tools.

• While playing an MP3 disc on an

MP3-compatible CD changer:

– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

– Changes the folder if pressed and held.

• While listening to an Apple iPod or a

JVC D. player:

– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with

D ∞.

– Enters the main menu with 5 U.

(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the

menu selecting buttons.)*

3 VOL – / VOL + buttons

• Adjusts the volume level.

4 SOUND button

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate

when throwing away or saving it.

• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom

equalizer).

5 SOURCE button

Caution:

• Selects the source.

* 5 U : Returns to the previous menu.

D ∞ : Confirms the selection.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons

• Searches for stations if pressed briefly.

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if

pressed and held.

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 11 and 12.)

• Changes the tracks if pressed briefly.

• While listening to an iPod or a D. player

(in menu selecting mode):

– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,

press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)

– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and

held.

To drop the volume in a

moment (ATT)

To restore the sound, press

it again.

To turn off the power

Getting started

Basic settings

Basic operations

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages

12 and 13.

Turn on the power.

1 Canceling the display

demonstrations

* You cannot select these sources if they

are not ready or not connected.

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”

2 Setting the clock

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust

the hour.

⁄

For FM/AM tuner

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then

adjust the minute.

3 Finish the procedure.

Adjust the volume.

To check the current clock

time when the power is

turned off

Volume level appears.

Volume level indicator

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to

receive

Radio operations

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be

lost.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO

indicator goes off.

Selected band appears.

Start searching for a station.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential

Memory)

When a station is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

want to store into.

2 Select a desired station frequency.

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when

automatic presetting is over.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically in the FM

band.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset

Disc operations

number 4 of the FM1 band.

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you

change the source or eject the disc.

Preset number flashes for a while.

To stop play and eject the

disc

Listening to a preset station

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you

want.

* If you have changed the external input

setting to “EXT IN” (see page 13), you

cannot select the CD changer.

Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 – 06:

To check the other information while

listening to an FM or AM station

For disc number from 07 – 12:

Clock Ô Frequency

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About MP3 and WMA discs

To go to the next or previous folders (only for

MP3 or WMA discs)

MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and

“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded

in “folders.”

For MP3 discs:

For WMA discs:

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer with your unit.

• You can also connect other CH-X series CD

changers (except CH-X99 and CH-X100).

These units are not compatible with MP3

discs.

• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD

changer.

• You cannot use the KD-MK series CD

changers with this unit.

• Disc text information recorded in the CD

Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text

compatible CD changer is connected.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly

To select a number from 01 – 06:

To select a number from 07 – 12:

To fast-forward or reverse the track

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA

discs, it is required that folders are assigned

with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their

folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

To go to the next or previous tracks

To select a particular track in a folder (for

MP3 or WMA discs):

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other main functions

Changing the display information

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks

within the same folder.

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing tracks

whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

While playing an MP3 or a WMA^*²disc

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG ON”

(see page 13)

• When “TAG DISP” is set to “TAG OFF”

: Clock with the current track number

Each time you press the button, you can

skip 10 tracks.

• After the last track, the first track will be

selected and vice versa.

: Elapsed playing time with the current

track number

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

If the current disc is an audio CD,

“NO NAME” appears.

Only for the built-in CD player.

If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag

information, folder name and file name

appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will

not light up.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting the playback modes

Sound adjustments

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to

the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

You can use only one of the following playback

modes at a time.

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

Ex.: When “ROCK” is selected

Mode

Plays repeatedly

Preset values

BAS

TRE

LOUD

TRK RPT

: The current track.

(bass) (treble) (loudness)

Indication (For)

FLDR RPT*⁴: All tracks of the current

folder.

USER

OFF

DISC RPT*⁵: All tracks of the current disc.

(Flat sound)

ROCK

+03

+01

+04

+02

+01

–02

+01

RPT OFF

: Cancels.

(Rock or disco music)

Random play

CLASSIC

OFF

(Classical music)

POPS

Mode

Plays at random

(Light music)

FLDR RND*⁴: All tracks of the current

folder, then tracks of the next

folder and so on.

HIP HOP

(Funk or rap music)

JAZZ

DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.

+03

OFF

(Jazz music)

MAG RND*⁵: All tracks of the inserted

discs.

RND OFF : Cancels.

Adjusting the sound

Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your

preference.

disc.

Only while playing discs in the CD

changer.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General settings — PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)

items listed in the table that follows.

Indication [Range]

BAS*¹(bass)

Adjust the bass. [–06 to +06]

2 Select a PSM item.

TRE*¹(treble)

Adjust the treble. [–06 to +06]

FAD*²(fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

[R06 to F06]

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.

BAL*³(balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

[L06 to R06]

LOUD*¹(loudness)

Boost low and high frequencies to produce

a well-balanced sound at low volume level.

[LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]

Ex.: When “DIMMER” is selected

SUB.W*⁴(subwoofer)

Adjust the subwoofer output level. [00 to 08]

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other

PSM items if necessary.

VOL (volume)

Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*⁵]

5 Finish the procedure.

When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,

the adjustment you have made is stored for

the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)

including “USER.”

If you are using a two-speaker system, set the

fader level to “00.”

This adjustment cannot affect the subwoofer

output.

This takes effect only when a subwoofer is

connected.

Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to

“WOOFER” (see page 13).

Depending on the amplifier gain control

setting. (See page 13 for details.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indications

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DEMO

DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated

Display

demonstration

automatically if no operation is done for about 20 seconds,

[6].

DEMO OFF : Cancels.

1 – 12, [6]

[Initial: 1 (1:00)]

CLOCK H

Hour adjustment

00 – 59, [6]

[Initial: 00 (1:00)]

CLOCK M

Minute adjustment

DIMMER

Dimmer

OFF

: Dims the display illumination of this unit.

: [Initial]; Cancels.

SCROLL*⁶

Scroll

ONCE

AUTO

OFF

: [Initial]; Scrolls the disc information once.

: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).

: Cancels.

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display regardless

of the setting.

WOOFER*⁷

Subwoofer cutoff

frequency

LOW

MID

: Frequencies lower than 90 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

: [Initial]; Frequencies lower than 135 Hz are sent to the

subwoofer.

HIGH

: Frequencies lower than 180 Hz are sent to the subwoofer.

EXT IN*⁸

CHANGER : [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [8], an Apple iPod or a

External input

JVC D. player, [14].

: To use any other external component than the above, [16].

EXT IN

When connecting the amplifier or subwoofer, set this correctly.

L/O MODE

Line output mode

REAR

: [Initial]; Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used

for connecting the speakers through an external amplifier.

WOOFER : Select if the REAR LINE OUT terminals are used for

connecting a subwoofer through an external amplifier.

TAG DISP

TAG ON

: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing MP3/

Tag display

WMA tracks, [10].

TAG OFF : Cancels.

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.

LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power of

the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from being

damaged.)

AMP GAIN

Amplifier gain

control

HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Displayed only when “L/O MODE” is set to “WOOFER.”

Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, or DISC.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 11 and 12.)

• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or

D. player is deactivated.

iPod®/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod

or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

To pause*¹or

stop*²playback

To resume

playback, press it

again.

• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for

controlling an iPod.

• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for

controlling a D. player.

To fast-forward or

reverse the track

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

with the interface adapter.

To go to the next

or previous tracks

For iPod

For D. player

Caution:

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the

vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting

or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

Preparations:

Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the

external input setting, see page 13.

Now the 5/∞/4 /¢

buttons

work as the menu selecting buttons*³.

2 Select the desired menu.

Playback starts automatically from

where it has been paused*¹or stopped*²

previously.

For iPod:

PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS

Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the

beginning)

Adjust the volume.

For D. player:

PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE

Ô TRACK Ô (back to the beginning)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Confirm the selection.

Random play

To move back to the previous

menu, press 5.

ALBM RND*⁴

Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of

the iPod.

• If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.

• If the selected item has another layer, you

will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3

until the desired track is played.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of the

iPod or “Random Play On” of the D. player.

• Holding 4 /¢

items at a time.

can skip 10

RND OFF

Cancels.

The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

If no operations are done for about

For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in

“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”

–

5 seconds.

–

When you confirm the selection of a track.

To check the other information while

listening to an iPod or a D. player

Selecting the playback modes

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

ONE RPT

Functions the same as “Repeat One” of

the iPod or “Repeat Mode One” for the

D. player.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as “Repeat All” of the

iPod or “Repeat Mode All” for the D. player.

RPT OFF

Cancels.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other external component Maintenance

operations

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the

connectors.

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe

the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth

moistened with alcohol, being careful not to

damage the connectors.

You can connect an external component to

the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line

Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX

Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

For listening to the iPod or D. player, refer to

pages 14 and 15.

Connector

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the

CD player in the following cases:

If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 13

and select the external input (“EXT IN”).

• After starting the heater in the car.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the CD player may

malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and

leave the unit turned on for a few hours until

the moisture evaporates.

Turn on the connected component

and start playing the source.

Adjust the volume.

How to handle discs

Center holder

When removing a disc from

its case, press down the center

holder of the case and lift the

disc out, holding it by the edges.

• Always hold the disc by the

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 11 and 12.)

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert

the disc around the center holder (with the

printed surface facing up).

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after

use.

To check the other information while

listening to an external component

Clock Ô EXT IN

To keep discs clean

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it

with a soft cloth in a straight line

from center to edge.

• Do not use any solvent (for example,

conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,

benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Disc operations

To play new discs

New discs may have some rough

spots around the inner and outer

edges. If such a disc is used, this

unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges with

a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does

not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital

Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-

DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may

not be recommended.

General

Do not use the following discs:

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/

CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),

MP3 and WMA formats.

• When a disc has been loaded, selecting

“DISC” for the playback source starts disc

play.

Warped disc

Sticker

Sticker residue

Stick-on label

Inserting a disc

• When a disc is inserted upside down, the disc

automatically ejects.

• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and

unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into

the loading slot.

More about this unit

Basic operations

Turning on the power

• By pressing SRC on the unit, you can also turn

on the power. If the source is ready, playback

also starts.

Playing a disc

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3

or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent

sounds.

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

Turning off the power

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can play back only files of the same

type which are first detected if a disc includes

both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/

WMA files.

• If you turn off the power while listening to a

disc, disc play will start from where playback

has been stopped previously, next time you

turn on the power.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs;

however, unclosed sessions will be skipped

while playing.

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play

back on this unit because of their disc

characteristics, or for the following reasons:

– Discs are dirty or scratched.

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens

inside the unit.

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

• During SSM search...

– All previously stored stations are erased and

stations are stored newly.

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

– When SSM is over, the station stored in

No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the

previously preset station is erased when a new

station is stored in the same preset number.

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are

written with “Packet Write” method.

– There are improper recording conditions

(missing data, etc.) or media conditions

(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time

since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than

that of regular CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective

seal stuck to the surface.

– Discs on which labels can be directly

printed by an ink jet printer.

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR

(variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy

in elapsed time display, and do not show

the actual elapsed time. Especially, after

performing the search function, this

difference becomes noticeable.

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of

200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and

MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate

format.

Using these discs under high temperatures or

high humidities may cause malfunctions or

damage to the unit.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

– WMA files which are not based upon

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>

(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums,

artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,

2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA

files.

• This unit can display only one-byte

characters. No other characters can be

correctly displayed.

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

Changing the source

• If you change the source, playback also stops

(without ejecting the disc).

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

meeting the conditions below:

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps

Next time you select “DISC” for the playback

source, disc play starts from where it has been

stopped previously.

– Sampling frequency:

Ejecting a disc

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,

Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

• The maximum number of characters for file/

folder names vary among the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo: up to 128 characters

– Joliet: up to 64 characters

– Windows long file name: up to 128

characters

• If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted

again into the loading slot to protect it from

dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

General settings—PSM

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the

volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the

unit automatically changes the volume level to

“VOL 30.”

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

iPod or D. player operations

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player,

some operations may not be performed

correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the

following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D. player is charged through this unit.

• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all

operations from the iPod or D. player are

disabled. Perform all operations from this

unit.

• If the text information includes more than

8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see

also page 13). This unit can display up to 40

characters.

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service

center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the

speakers.

• The unit does not work at all.

• SSM automatic presetting does not

work.

• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

Store stations manually.

• Static noise while listening to the radio. Connect the antenna firmly.

• Disc cannot be played back. Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played back. • Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot be • Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component

skipped.

which you used for recording.

• Unlock the disc (see page 10).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

• Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Disc can be neither played back nor

ejected.

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted.

• Check the cords and connections.

Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

• Disc cannot be played back.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in

the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,

Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

the file names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not

add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

To be continued...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• A longer readout time is required

(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the

display).

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.

• Tracks do not play back in the order

you have intended them to play.

• Elapsed playing time is not correct.

Playback order is determined when the files are

recorded.

This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused

by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.

Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• “NO FILES” appears on the display.

• Correct characters are not displayed

(e.g. album name).

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

This unit can only display letters (upper case),

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.

Insert a disc into the magazine.

• “NO MAG” appears on the display.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Insert the magazine.

Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly

and press the reset button of the CD changer.

Press the reset button of the CD changer.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

• The CD changer does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

• The iPod or D. player does not turn

on or does not work.

• Check the connecting cable and its connection.

• Update the firmware version.

•

Change the battery.

• Buttons do not work as intended.

• The sound is distorted.

The functions of the buttons have been changed.

Press MODE before performing the operation.

Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the

iPod/D. player.

• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.

the display.

• Playback stops.

The headphones are disconnected during

playback. Restart the playback operation using the

control panel (see page 14).

• No sound can be heard when

connecting an iPod nano.

Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.

• No sound can be heard.

Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,

connect it again.

• “ERROR 01” appears on the display

when connecting a D. player.

• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”

appears on the display.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or

D. player.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and

iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.

Check the connection between the adapter and

this unit.

• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.

not work after disconnecting from

this unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

CD PLAYER SECTION

Maximum Power Output:

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical

pickup (semiconductor laser)

Front: 50 W per channel

Rear: 50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz

to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%

total harmonic distortion.

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Dynamic Range:

96 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit

MP3 Decoding Format:

Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz

to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%

total harmonic distortion.

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Tone Control Range:

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding

Bass:

10 dB at 100 Hz

Format:

Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

Subwoofer-Out Level/Impedance:

2.0 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps

GENERAL

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System: Negative ground

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Other Terminal: CD changer

Dimensions (W × H × D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm

Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm

Mass (approx.):

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

FM:

87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

AM: 531 kHz to 1 602 kHz

[FM Tuner]

1.4 kg (excluding accessories)

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

Design and specifications are subject to change

without notice.

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 30 dB

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States

and/or other countries.

Capture Ratio: 1.5 dB

[AM Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 μV

Selectivity: 35 dB

• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

EN, CT

1105DTSMDTJEIN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KD-G425

Installation/Connection Manual

ϰ༬ꢀ௥ો˿̱

GET0350-010A

[UT]

1105DTSMDTJEIN

EN, CT

ENGLISH

ꢁ ˁ̂

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle does

not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC car audio dealers.

ʹጅ෮̈́՟·

ޠڈ

ꢀ12 V é

࠸

๩ોϚ

ྑກԧ஁éϨ

઱

ԾቩԅЉ௠ɾྐ຀Ԧ஀ç۱ᄔ

࠱

ࡴ

ྐ

Ꮻ᜵ಗ዇ç̣̈́ϚꢀJVCꢀԆԾ

ࡖ

ᛏ˜ኀੋளකռé

ᙲѿ

WARNINGS

Վ̊ഠཔçܿᙯϚϯ༫ʹጅ˃

çᔃළྐЖ

࠷ڄ

๨çՓӕ

Љྐཔ௲௤૊Ϧé

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all

electrical connections before installing the unit.

ëꢁϰ༬ҭ୙݉ੁͬઆ͵ጆ

Ϛሉ

ࡍ

๙ોгԿԾê

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.

ٍิ!

ëꢀӕۘᎳീӦಗ

ᖃ

࠷׆

ம

ڄࡩ

ۘᎳീéϨ

ۘᎳീ໩ગጛᖢçቁώꢀJVCꢀԆԾ

ࡖ

ᛏ˜ኀੋ༿੕é

ëꢀ݈໯֜

໯ಙᑵ዇

ఛʨ᎔ʈ̷୊ᏻʨ

ꢀ50 Wçմ

ꢀ4 Ω - 8 ΩéϨ

ఛʨ̷୊ʮ

ꢀ ꢀꢀ50 Wçቁቆओꢀ“AMP GAIN”ꢀ௎

ࡩ׆

ç̣Վ̊ಙᑵ዇๑ᖢéꢂ੉ኌ՟·ი

ए

୶ꢀꢃꢄꢀ

ࡗ

éꢅ

ëꢀ

Վ̊ྐ຀ഠཔçቁ·ഽሇઘ̸уͶՠΈྐለ

ၷʪé

Notes:

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC car audio

dealer.

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at

the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than

50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 13 of the

INSTRUCTIONS).

ëꢀʹጅ՟·݈çಞᇊ̕๡݃ᇊéϕЏçϚ୰̳ʹጅइçʮ˻ʿ

࠱

᙮ညಞᇊ̕é

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

Heat sink

ಞᇊ̕

ྑກ֝ಚᑶወોሉٍิ՗ො!

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

ëꢁ˞ˢӖಚᑶወዘሉોᏄોгྑЗèѵ۲͵ጆઆ๢ᘸ

ࡍ

๒ᖣê

ëꢀϚӕಙᑵ዇዗ለ૊Ꮓ૊вಙᑵ዇˃

çᐓ

઱ԆԾʕ

ಙᑵ዇ለཔé

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit

will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in

your car.

Parts list for installation and connection

ϰ༬֝௥ો

ྒྷέ჋

The following parts are provided for this unit. After checking them, please set them correctly.

ʓλྒά

Ꮂʹጅಏա

éଡᓭ̣݈ç͸ᇧ

અմ༫਎é

A / B

Trim plate

༫ྟख

Hard case/Control panel

ഢୢꢁ૆վ

ػࡒ

Sleeve

ࢭ

ጅೋ

Power cord

ྐཔ௤૊·

਎ለӧ

Washer (ø5)

࿑੡ꢀ(ø5)

Lock nut (M5)

ᕬ

ᒘ͹ꢀ(M5)

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)

ႌ֣ᒘनꢀ(M5 × 20 mm)

Rubber cushion

ጁሗՎ኏࿑

Handles

଍

ӕ˾

Remote controller

ჲ૆዇

Battery

ྐЖ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

ϰ༬ꢁꢂ༬௏éׇ֤ϛᄮ

ؼڸ

˗ꢃ

ڄࡒ

࿌༱

Εʄյ

ڄܓ

ϯ༫ദҺéϨ

઱Љ੕ᖅç

ᄔ

࠱

Љᘕ਎

ࢭ

˔ά

ཊऄçቁώꢀJVC

ԆԾ

ࡖ

ᛏ˜ኀੋ

਎

ࢭ

˔άաᏻ˙͌༿੕é

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information

regarding installation kits, consult your JVC car audio dealer or a company supplying kits.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

ëꢀϨ

઱ʿ঻ᇧ

Ϩщ͸ᇧϙϯ༫ʹጅçᏻቁϐत

ӑிʆ

࢜

գϯ༫é

Do the required electrical connections.

නм

ᄔ

ྐཔ௤૊é

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

Ҿᛮጅೋ

ߴڄ

дçӕ͙

ࢭ

ጅೋԕ֣Ϛᄭ

˖é

When you stand the unit, be careful not to damage the fuse on the rear.

઱቎৹ʹጅइçʮ˻ʿ

࠱

๑ᖢ

௰

ۘᎳീé

Removing the unit

։͵ጆ

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

ֈʹጅ

çᏻઅʹጅ݈௰

֜௤૊௰˜ᖑළé

Insert the two handles, then pull them as

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

࿌

Εçઅղ̕

଍

ӕ˾಍ʈ̿ᆥç೸݈ძᗌ

ϙનղ਴ώ͙؁ղ̕ӕ˾çʹጅᎲ˃؁̳é

When using the optional stay / ࠝ᎛Έ́ᆊ

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / ࠝˀՠΈ͚

ࢮ

ጆೌϰ༬͵ጆ

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

̣ᕙΉ೻ꢀ(TOYOTA) ԆԾ

բ ꢀ࡛ζ֊̳ԆԾЂ

ࡖ

ጅç೸݈અʹጅ༫ʈմ

т໯é

Stay (option)

̀ᆉ

ꢀꢂ᎚·

ꢅ

Fire wall

Վ̑

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

ͦᏃᒘീਐ (M5 × 8 mm)*²

*²Not supplied for this unit.

*²ʿᎲʹጅಏաé

Dashboard

ᄭ

ػڷ

Bracket*²

ࣙ

*²

Screw (option)

ᒘീਐꢀꢂ᎚·

ꢅ

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

ͦᏃᒘീਐ (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Pocket

ೋ

Bracket*²

ࣙ

*²

Install the unit at an angle of less

than 30˚.

અʹጅϯ༫Ϛ˲

ꢀ30˚ꢀ

Դܾé

Note

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer screws are

used, they could damage the unit.

!ꢀӕʹጅϯ༫ϚЁ

ࣙ

ʕइçੀͫ՟·ꢀ8 mmꢀ

ڄۂ

ᒘീਐéϨ՟·ཫ

ڄۂ

ᒘീਐç๡๑ᖢʹጅé

ٍิꢁ

ᄑ૜ਜ

TROUBLESHOOTING

•ꢀۙᎴുጜᔄê

*ꢀᐓ

߹и዗ለ૊Ꮓ֜෨и዗ለ૊Ꮓ

Ѵ૊᙮͸ᇧ%

• The fuse blows.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

• Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

•ꢀྑກˀ়ો௣ê

*ꢀᐓ

෦и዗ለ૊Ꮓ

Ѵ૊ʕ%

• No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

•ꢀಚᑶወԆЊᑶ

ࡗ

*ꢀᐓ

ಙᑵ዇᎔̳዗ለ૊Ꮓ

Ѵഠཔ%

• Sound is distorted.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

•ꢀᑶ

ࡗ

͜ॳê

*ꢀᐓ

ಙᑵ዇᎔̳ၷʪ

Ѵ૊ϙ%

*ꢀᐓ

ಙᑵ዇

ͣꢀ(L)è͆ꢀ(R) ၷʪ

࠷ڄ

๨ꢀ(–)

Ѵθψ૊ϙ%

• Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

•ꢀ዇

ࡗ

ʹᓿ

ࡗ

ᛐê

*ꢀ݈૊ϙၷʪႩԾԽ

Ѵ՟·ཛഠ֜ཛ۹

ྐለ௤૊%

• This unit becomes hot.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

•ꢀ͵ጆഛᇋê

*ꢀᐓ

ಙᑵ዇᎔̳ၷʪ

Ѵ૊ϙ%

*ꢀᐓ

ಙᑵ዇

ͣꢀ(L)è͆ꢀ(R) ၷʪ

࠷ڄ

๨ꢀ(–)

Ѵθψ૊ϙ%

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

•ꢁ͵ጆҭθˀ়ይіê

*ꢀ઱

Ѵʵ໩

ࡌ

໯઱

ጅஇ%

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ENGLISH

ˁ̂

ྑཕ௥ો

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Typical connections / ն

څܔ

ોሉ̅٘

ોሉ

ꢁ!ꢁ̥அᐓ

ԆԾ˖

ለཔéʿ͸ᇧ

૊ለ๡዗

ࠓ

ʹጅᘷ

ࡌ

๑ᖢé

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause serious

damage to this unit.

ྐʍለ

˺ለ֜ԾԽ

௤૊዇˺ለϚᖄиʕ̈́঻Љ

ʿψé

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

1 ՜ຖʓ࿌

Ε˃ЎҺ௤૊ྐ຀ለ

ᖄи዗ለé

2ꢀ અ˭ለ

ྐለ௤૊৹գé

1 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

2 Connect the antenna cord.

3ꢀ ఛ݈çӕ਎ለӧ

಍Ꮓ಍Ϛʹጅʕé

3 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

To external components (see diagram

)

в͙૊இάꢀꢂ੉ኌ࿌

ꢀꢅ

Rear ground

terminal

ʹጅ݈

ࠌ

૊ϙၷʪ

15 A fuse

15 AꢀۘᎳീ

Antenna terminal

Line out (see diagram

᎔̳ၷʪꢀꢂ੉ኌ࿌

ꢀ ꢀꢅ

)

˭ለၷʪ

Not supplied for this unit.

ʿᎲʹጅಏաé

Ignition switch

ᓭ̑ළᘕ

Black

෨и

To metallic body or chassis of the car

૊в

ᚙᝂ

ԆԾ

ᇟ

Yellow *²

෦и*²

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery

(bypassing the ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

૊вۘᎳീవ˔˖

ۈڄ

ᚙၷʪçۘᎳീవ˔

Ծ༫ྐЖ

௤૊

ꢂ·

अཔᓭ̑ළᘕꢅꢀꢂ

׆ݔ

ꢀ12 Vꢅ

Fuse block

ۘᎳീవ˔

Red

߹и

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

૊вۘᎳീవ˔˖

ۈڄ

ᚙၷʪ

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to

installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise

power cannot be turned on.

ʹጅ͵ϯ༫इçනмʳѕ

ٜᐓ

ͫෝӕ௠዗ለ૊ʕçѴ۱ʿ঻ළ૧ྐ຀é

ꢀ

Blue

ᕇи

To the automatic antenna if any (250 mA max.)

૊вбੂ˭ለꢀꢂࠜЉ༫௎ꢅꢀꢂఛʨꢀ250 mAꢅ

Blue with white stripe

ᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙ

To the remote lead of other equipment (200 mA max.)

௤૊в͏ɾ

ᄭ዇

ჲ૆዗ለꢀꢂఛʨꢀ200 mA ꢅ

White with black stripe

ΎиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

Gray with black stripe

НиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

Gray

Ни

Green with black stripe

ႋиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

Green

ႋи

Purple with black stripe

ാиઘЉ෨и଍ঙ

Purple

ാи

White

Ύи

Left speaker (front)

ͣಙᑵ዇ꢀꢂ

໯ꢅ

Right speaker (front)

͆ಙᑵ዇ꢀꢂ

໯ꢅ

Left speaker (rear)

ͣಙᑵ዇ꢀꢂ݈໯ꢅ

Right speaker (rear)

͆ಙᑵ዇ꢀꢂ݈໯ꢅ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting the external amplifier or subwoofer/ ꢀ௥ોг͚௱̸ୋ

ʩወ

ච

ࡍ

ࡗ

ಚᑶወ

઱̣̈́௤૊̷୊

ʨ዇̣ಏ

ౚԾ

ࡖڄ

ᛏԦ஀é

ëꢀઅჲ૆዗ለꢀꢁᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙꢂꢀ֜մ̧༫໯ʕ

ჲ૆዗ለ௤૊৹գç̣

̣̈́௢ཫʹጅනм

ჲ૆é

ëꢀઆಚᑶወ֝͵ጆᔄෆèκોʖ̸ୋ

ʩወêઆ͵ጆ

ಚᑶወોሉ

໰ˀΈê

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it

can be controlled through this unit.

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker

leads of this unit unused.

ꢀ

Remote lead

ჲ૆዗ለ

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Y-

௤૊዗ለꢀꢁʿᎲʹጅಏաꢂ

To the remote lead of other equipment or automatic

antenna if any

௤૊в͏ɾ

ᄭ዇

ჲ૆዗ለ

бੂ˭ለꢀꢁࠜЉ

༫௎ꢂ

Set “L/O MODE” to “REAR” (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

આ“L/O MODE” ௏ׇ

“REAR” (੊ኍՠΈკ

ऐ

୷ꢀ13

ࡘ

ê)

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

ჲ૆዗ለꢀꢁᕇиઘЉΎи଍ঙꢂ

You can connect a power amplifier for rear speakers.

઱̈́

݈໯ಙᑵ዇௤૊̷୊

ʨ዇é

JVC Amplifier

JVC ̸ୋ

ʩወ

Rear speakers

݈໯ಙᑵ዇

Front speakers

໯ಙᑵ዇

Set “L/O MODE” to “WOOFER” (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

આ “L/O MODE” ௏ׇ

“WOOFER” (੊ኍՠΈკ

ऐ

୷ꢀ13

ࡘ

ê)

You can also connect a subwoofer to the REAR LINE OUT terminals.

઱ʛ̣̈́અඟ

ࡌ

ࡖ

ಙᑵ዇௤૊вꢀREAR LINE OUTꢀၷʪé

Firmly attach the ground wire to the metallic body or to the chassis of the car—to the place uncoated with

paint (if coated with paint, remove the paint before attaching the wire). Failure to do so may cause damage

to the unit.

અϙለႩ

ᚙԾᝂ

ږ׻

ԆԾ

ᇟႌં௤૊ç௤૊ளᏻ༳ԅЉூٛွᕒႵꢀꢁϨ

ʵดʕٛွçϚ௤૊

ྐለ

çઅٛွս̓ꢂéϨ

ʿ௠ᆟਭç̈́঻๡๑ᖢʹጅé

JVC Amplifier

ꢀ

JVC ̸ୋ

ʩወ

Subwoofer

ඟ

ࡌ

ࡖ

ಙᑵ዇

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

༙ྐងꢀꢁʿᎲʹጅಏաꢂ

C ^{Connecting the external components / ௥ોյ̨͚௱}

CD changer, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / CDꢀಘၫወéApple iPod®

ꢀJVC D. player

• Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) આ͚௱᎕ʉ௏ׇ௏гꢀ“CHANGER” (ಘၫወ) (੊ኍՠΈკ

ऐ

୷ꢀ13

ࡘ

ê)

You can connect these components as illustrated below.

઱̣̈́નʓ࿌

Ε௤૊௠՗இάé

઱̣̈́՟·

ࡒߍ

ቱ਎዇ꢀꢁʿ਎కꢂꢀ—ꢀKS-PD100 (iPodꢀ·ꢂꢀ

ꢀKS-PD500ꢀꢁ*ꢃ playerꢀ·ꢂꢀ௤૊ꢀ

iPod*⁵

ꢀ*ꢃ playeré

The iPod*⁵or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for

iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

CAUTION / ʯ˼î

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod ꢁ͏͙ᒯ໯ꢂ

• Before connecting the external components , make sure that the unit is turned off.

• ௤૊͙௰இά˃

çζᇧ

ʹጅʵ໩ᘕ௻é

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

JVC D. player ꢁ͏͙ᒯ໯ꢂ

JVC CD changer

JVC CDꢀಘၫወ

CD changer jack

CD ಗၪ዇಍

ࣙ

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

iPod

ꢀApple Computer, Inc. ăᙧ

ྐ༃˙͌ĄϚ

ࠀ

੢˪մ̧੢

ࣁ

ٌ̰

ੋᆤé

Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer

઱

ꢀCD ಗၪ዇਎క

௤૊ྐង

Other external component / յ̨͚ોஈέ

• Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 13 of the INSTRUCTIONS.)

આ͚௱᎕ʉ௏ׇ௏гꢀ“EXT IN” (͚௱᎕ʉ) (੊ኍՠΈკ

ऐ

୷ꢀ13

ࡘ

ê)

External component

͚௱ஈέ

CD changer jack

CD ಗၪ዇಍

ࣙ

External component

͚௱ஈέ

Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

ྐཔ᎔ʈቱ਎዇ꢀKS-U57 ꢁʿᎲʹጅಏաꢂ

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

3.5 mm Θᝂᑵਁі಍

ࣙ

AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

AUXꢀ᎔ʈቱ਎዇ꢀKS-U58 (ʿᎲʹጅಏա)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

CD RECEIVER

РЕСИВЕР С ПРОИГРЫВАТЕЛЕМ КОМПАКТ-ДИСКОВ

KD-G427

В соответствии с Законом Российской Федерации “О защите прав потребителей” срок службы

(годности) данного товара “по истечении которого он может представлять опасность для жизни,

здоровья потребителя, причинять вред его имуществу или окружающей среде” составляет семь (7)

лет со дня производства. Этот срок является временем, в течение которого потребитель данного

товара может безопасно им пользоваться при условии соблюдения инструкции по эксплуатации

данного товара, проводя необходимое обслуживание, включающее замену расходных материалов

и/или соответствующее ремонтное обеспечение в специализированном сервисном центре.

Дополнительные косметические материалы к данному товару, поставляемые вместе с ним, могут

храниться в течение двух (2) лет со дня его производства.

Срок службы (годности), кроме срока хранения дополнительных косметических материалов,

упомянутых в предыдущих двух пунктах, не затрагивает никаких других прав потребителя, в

частности, гарантийного свидетельства JVC, которое он может получить в соответствии с законом о

правах потребителя или других законов, связанных с ним.

For installation and connections, refer to the separate manual.

Указания по установке и выполнению соединений приводятся в отдельной инструкции.

For canceling the display demonstration, see page 6.

Информацию об отмене демонстрации функций дисплея см. на стр. 6.

INSTRUCTIONS

ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ

GET0353-001A

[EE]

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Thank you for purchasing a JVC product.

Please read all instructions carefully before operation, to ensure your complete understanding and to

obtain the best possible performance from the unit.

IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS

1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts inside the unit; leave

all servicing to qualified service personnel.

3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock failed or defeated.

Avoid direct exposure to beam.

4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED OUTSIDE THE UNIT.

How to reset your unit

How to use the MODE button

If you press MODE, the unit goes into functions

mode, then the number buttons and 5/∞

buttons work as different function buttons.

Ex.: When number button 2 works as

MO (monaural) button.

• Your preset adjustments will also be erased.

How to forcibly eject a disc

Time countdown indicator

To use these buttons for their original

functions again after pressing MODE, wait for

5 seconds without pressing any of these buttons

until the functions mode is cleared or press

MODE again.

• If this does not work, reset your unit.

• Be careful not to drop the disc when it ejects.

How to detach/attach the control panel

Detaching...

Attaching...

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

How to read this manual

• Button operations are mainly explained with

the illustrations in the table below.

CONTENTS

• Some related tips and notes are explained in

“More about this unit” (see pages 21 – 23).

Control panel ...................................

Remote controller — ^RM-RK50.............

Getting started.................................

Basic operations....................................................

Press briefly.

Radio operations ..............................

Press repeatedly.

FM RDS operations............................

Searching for your favorite FM RDS programme ...

Disc operations................................. 10

Playing a disc in the unit ....................................... 10

Playing discs in the CD changer............................. 10

Press either

one.

Sound adjustments........................... 13

General settings — PSM ................... 14

DAB tuner operations........................ 17

iPod®/D. player operations ................ 18

Other external component operations... 20

More about this unit ......................... 21

Maintenance .................................... 24

Troubleshooting............................... 24

Specifications................................... 27

Press and hold until your

desired response begins.

Press and hold both

buttons at the same time.

The following marks are used to indicate...

: Built-in CD player operations.

: External CD changer operations.

: Indicator displayed for the

corresponding operation.

Warning:

If you need to operate the unit while driving,

be sure to look ahead carefully or you may be

involved in a traffic accident.

For safety...

• Do not raise the volume level too much, as

this will block outside sounds, making driving

dangerous.

• Stop the car before performing any

complicated operations.

Caution on volume setting:

Discs produce very little noise compared

with other sources. Lower the volume

before playing a disc to avoid damaging

the speakers by the sudden increase of the

output level.

Temperature inside the car...

If you have parked the car for a long time in hot

or cold weather, wait until the temperature in

the car becomes normal before operating the

unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Control panel

Parts identification

Display window

(standby/on attenuator) button

Display window

2 5 (up) / ∞ (down) and 4 /¢

buttons

3 Remote sensor

a Disc type indicators—WMA, MP3

s Playback source indicators—

CH: Lights up only when CD-CH is selected

as the playback source.

DISC: Lights up for the built-in CD player.

d Playback mode / item indicators—

RND (random),

RPT (repeat)

f LOUD (loudness) indicator

g EQ (equalizer) indicator

• DO NOT expose the remote sensor to

strong light (direct sunlight or artificial

lighting).

4 Loading slot

(disc),

(folder),

5 Display window

6 0 (eject) button

7 T/P (traffic programme/programme type)

button

h Sound mode (C-EQ: custom equalizer)

indicators—JAZZ, CLASSIC, HIP HOP

POPS, ROCK, USER

8 SRC (source) button

9 BAND button

p Control dial

j Tr (track) indicator

q SEL (select) button

w EQ (equalizer) button

e MO (monaural) button

r SSM (Strong-station Sequential Memory)

button

k Disc information indicators—TAG (ID3

Tag),

(folder),

(track/file)

l Source display / Volume level indicator

/ Main display

z RDS indicators—TP, PTY, AF, REG

x Tuner reception indicators—ST (stereo),

MO (monaural)

t Number buttons

y RPT (repeat) button

u RND (random) button

i MODE button

o DISP (display) button

;

(control panel release) button

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Main elements and features

Remote controller —

RM-RK50

Installing the lithium coin battery

(CR2025)

(standby/on/attenuator) button

• Turns the power on if pressed briefly or

attenuates the sound when the power is

on.

Aim the remote controller directly at the

remote sensor on the unit. Make sure there is

no obstacle in between.

• Turns the power off if pressed and held.

Warning:

2 5 U (up) / D (down) ∞ buttons

• Changes the FM/AM/DAB bands with

5 U.

• Do not install any battery other than

CR2025 or its equivalent; otherwise, it may

explode.

• Store the battery in a place where children

cannot reach to avoid risk of accident.

• To prevent the battery from over-heating,

cracking, or starting a fire:

– Do not recharge, short, disassemble,

heat the battery, or dispose of it in a fire.

– Do not leave the battery with other

metallic materials.

• Changes the preset stations with D ∞.

• Changes the folder of the MP3/WMA

discs.

• While playing an MP3 disc on an

MP3-compatible CD changer:

– Changes the disc if pressed briefly.

– Changes the folder if pressed and held.

• While listening to an Apple iPod® or a

JVC D. player:

– Pauses/stops or resumes playback with

D ∞.

– Do not poke the battery with tweezers or

similar tools.

– Wrap the battery with tape and insulate

when throwing away or saving it.

– Enter the main menu with 5 U.

(Now 5 U/D ∞/2 R/F 3 work as the

menu selecting buttons.)*

3 VOL – / VOL + buttons

• Adjusts the volume level.

4 SOUND button

Caution:

• Selects the sound mode (C-EQ: custom

equalizer).

5 SOURCE button

• Selects the source.

* 5U

D ∞

: Returns to the previous menu.

: Confirms the selection.

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

6 2 R (reverse) / F (forward) 3 buttons

• Searches for stations (or services) if

pressed briefly.

Volume level appears.

• Searches for ensembles if pressed and

held.

• Fast-forwards or reverses the track if

pressed and held.

• Changes the tracks of the disc if pressed

briefly.

Volume level indicator

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 13 and 14.)

• While listening to an iPod or a D. player

(in menu selecting mode):

– Selects an item if pressed briefly. (Then,

press D ∞ to confirm the selection.)

– Skips 10 items at a time if pressed and

held.

To drop the volume in a

moment (ATT)

To restore the sound, press

it again.

To turn off the power

Getting started

Basic operations

Basic settings

Turn on the power.

• See also “General settings — PSM” on pages

14 – 16.

* You cannot select these sources if they

are not ready or not connected.

1 Canceling the display

demonstrations

Select “DEMO,” then “DEMO OFF.”

2 Setting the clock

⁄

Select “CLOCK H” (hour), then adjust

the hour.

Select “CLOCK M” (minute), then

adjust the minute.

Select “24H/12H,” then “24H” (hour) or

“12H” (hour).

•

For FM/AM tuner

For DAB tuner

3 Finish the procedure.

Adjust the volume.

To check the current clock

time when the power is

turned off

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to

receive

Radio operations

Lights up when monaural mode is activated.

Reception improves, but stereo effect will be

lost.

Lights up when receiving an FM stereo

broadcast with sufficient signal strength.

To restore the stereo effect, repeat the same

procedure. “MONO OFF” appears and the MO

indicator goes off.

Selected band appears.

Start searching for a station.

Storing stations in memory

You can preset six stations for each band.

FM station automatic presetting—

SSM (Strong-station Sequential

Memory)

When a station is received, searching

stops.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

1 Select the FM band (FM1 – FM3) you

want to store into.

Note:

FM1 and FM2: 87.5 MHz – 108.0 MHz

FM3: 65.00 MHz – 74.00 MHz

To tune in to a station manually

In step ! above...

“SSM” flashes, then disappears when

automatic presetting is over.

2 Select a desired station frequency.

Local FM stations with the strongest signals are

searched and stored automatically in the FM

band.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Manual presetting

Ex.: Storing FM station of 92.5 MHz into preset

FM RDS operations

number 4 of the FM1 band.

What you can do with RDS

RDS (Radio Data System) allows FM stations

to send an additional signal along with their

regular programme signals.

By receiving the RDS data, this unit can do the

following:

• Programme Type (PTY) Search (see the

following)

• TA (Traffic Announcement) and PTY

Standby Receptions (see pages 9 and 15)

• Tracing the same programme automatically

—Network-Tracking Reception (see page 10)

• Programme Search (see page 15)

Preset number flashes for a while.

Searching for your favorite

FM RDS programme

Listening to a preset station

You can tune in to a station broadcasting your

favorite programme by searching for a PTY

code.

• To store your favorite programme types, see

page 9.

2 Select the preset station (1 – 6) you

want.

The last selected PTY code appears.

Select one of your favorite preset

programme types.

To check the current clock time while

listening to an FM (non-RDS) or AM station

• For FM RDS stations, see page 10.

Frequency Ô Clock

Select one of the PTY codes (see

page 10).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Start searching for your favorite

programme.

Using the standby receptions

TA Standby Reception

TA Standby Reception allows the unit to switch

temporarily to Traffic Announcement (TA)

from any source other than AM.

The volume changes to the preset TA volume

level if the current level is lower than the preset

level (see page 15).

To activate TA Standby Reception

The TP (Traffic Programme)

indicator either lights up or

flashes.

If there is a station broadcasting a

programme of the same PTY code as you

have selected, that station is tuned in.

• If the TP indicator lights up, TA Standby

Reception is activated.

• If the TP indicator flashes, TA Standby

Reception is not yet activated. (This occurs

when you are listening to an FM station

without the RDS signals required for TA

Standby Reception.)

Storing your favorite programme

types

You can store six favorite programme types.

Preset programme types in the number buttons

(1 to 6):

To activate TA Standby Reception, tune in to

another station providing these signals. The

TP indicator will stop flashing and remain lit.

1 Select a PTY code (see page 8).

To deactivate the TA Standby Reception

The TP indicator goes off.

2 Select the preset number (1 – 6) you

want to store into.

PTY Standby Reception

PTY Standby Reception allows the unit to

switch temporarily to your favorite PTY

programme from any source other than AM.

To activate and select your favorite PTY code

for PTY Standby Reception, see page 15.

The PTY indicator either lights up or flashes.

• If the PTY indicator lights up, PTY Standby

Reception is activated.

• If the PTY indicator flashes, PTY Standby

Reception is not yet activated.

To activate PTY Standby Reception, tune in

to another station providing these signals. The

PTY indicator will stop flashing and remain

lit.

Ex.: When “ROCK M” is selected

3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to store other

PTY codes into other preset numbers.

4 Finish the procedure.

To deactivate the PTY Standby Reception,

select “OFF” for the PTY code (see page 15).

The PTY indicator goes off.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tracing the same programme—

Network-Tracking Reception

Disc operations

Playing a disc in the unit

All tracks will be played repeatedly until you

change the source or eject the disc.

When driving in an area where FM reception

is not sufficient enough, this unit automatically

tunes in to another FM RDS station of the

same network, possibly broadcasting the same

programme with stronger signals (see the

illustration below).

When shipped from the factory, Network-

Tracking Reception is activated.

To change the Network-Tracking Reception

setting, see “AF-REG” on page 15.

To stop play and eject the

disc

Programme A broadcasting on different frequency areas

(01 – 05)

Playing discs in the CD changer

All discs in the magazine will be played

repeatedly until you change the source.

• Ejecting the magazine will also stop playing.

* If you have changed the external input

setting to “EXT IN” (see page 16), you

cannot select the CD changer.

To check the current clock time while

listening to an FM RDS station

Station name (PS) = Station

Frequency = Programme type

(PTY) = Clock = (back to the

beginning)

Select a disc.

For disc number from 01 – 06:

For disc number from 07 – 12:

PTY codes

NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, SPORT, EDUCATE, DRAMA, CULTURE,

SCIENCE, VARIED, POP M (music), ROCK M (music), EASY

M (music), LIGHT M (music), CLASSICS, OTHER M (music),

WEATHER, FINANCE, CHILDREN, SOCIAL, RELIGION, PHONE

IN, TRAVEL, LEISURE, JAZZ, COUNTRY, NATION M (music),

OLDIES, FOLK M (music), DOCUMENT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About MP3 and WMA discs

To locate a particular track (for CD) or folder

(for MP3 or WMA discs) directly

MP3 and WMA “tracks” (words “file” and

“track” are used interchangeably) are recorded

in “folders.”

To select a number from 01 – 06:

About the CD changer

It is recommended to use a JVC MP3-

compatible CD changer with your unit.

• You can also connect other CH-X series CD

changers (except CH-X99 and CH-X100).

These units are not compatible with MP3

discs.

To select a number from 07 – 12:

• You cannot play any WMA disc in the CD

changer.

• You cannot use the KD-MK series CD

changers with this unit.

• Disc text information recorded in the CD

Text can be displayed when a JVC CD Text

compatible CD changer is connected.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• To use direct folder access on MP3/WMA

discs, it is required that folders are assigned

with 2-digit numbers at the beginning of their

folder names—01, 02, 03, and so on.

To select a particular track in a folder (for

MP3 or WMA discs):

To fast-forward or reverse the track

To go to the next or previous tracks

To go to the next or previous folders (only for

MP3 or WMA discs)

For MP3 discs:

For WMA discs:

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Other main functions

Changing the display information

While playing an audio CD or a CD Text

Skipping tracks quickly during play

Only possible on JVC

MP3-compatible CD changer

• For MP3 or WMA discs, you can skip tracks

within the same folder.

While playing an MP3 or a WMA ²disc

• When “TAG DISP” is set to

“TAG ON” (see page 16)

Ex.: To select track 32 while playing a track

whose number is a single digit (1 to 9)

• When “TAG DISP” is set to

“TAG OFF”

Each time you press the button, you can

skip 10 tracks.

• After the last track, the first track will be

selected and vice versa.

: Elapsed playing time with the current

track number

: Clock with the current track number

If the current disc is an audio CD,

“NO NAME” appears.

Only for the built-in CD player.

If an MP3/WMA file does not have Tag

information, folder name and file name

appear. In this case, the TAG indicator will

not light up.

Prohibiting disc ejection

You can lock a disc in the loading slot.

To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same

procedure.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Selecting the playback modes

Sound adjustments

You can select a preset sound mode suitable to

the music genre (C-EQ: custom equalizer).

You can use only one of the following playback

modes at a time.

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

Preset values

BAS

TRE

LOUD

(bass) (treble) (loudness)

Indication (For)

USER

(Flat sound)

OFF

Mode

Plays repeatedly

ROCK

(Rock or disco music)

TRK RPT

: The current track.

+03

+01

+04

+02

+01

–02

+01

FLDR RPT*¹: All tracks of the current

folder.

CLASSIC

(Classical music)

OFF

DISC RPT*²: All tracks of the current disc.

POPS

(Light music)

RPT OFF

: Cancels.

Random play

HIP HOP

(Funk or rap music)

JAZZ

(Jazz music)

+03

OFF

Mode

Plays at random

FLDR RND*¹: All tracks of the current

folder, then tracks of the next

folder and so on.

Adjusting the sound

You can adjust the sound characteristics to your

preference.

DISC RND : All tracks of the current disc.

MAG RND*²: All tracks of the inserted

discs.

RND OFF : Cancels.

Only while playing an MP3 or a WMA

disc.

Only while playing discs in the CD

changer.

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General settings — PSM

You can change PSM (Preferred Setting Mode)

items listed in the table that follows.

Ex.: When “TRE” is selected

2 Select a PSM item.

Indication [Range]

BAS*¹(bass)

Adjust the bass. [–06 to +06]

TRE*¹(treble)

Adjust the treble. [–06 to +06]

FAD*²(fader)

Adjust the front and rear speaker balance.

[R06 to F06]

Ex.: When “DIMMER” is selected

3 Adjust the PSM item selected.

BAL (balance)

Adjust the left and right speaker balance.

[L06 to R06]

LOUD*¹(loudness)

Boost low and high frequencies to produce

a well-balanced sound at low volume level.

[LOUD ON or LOUD OFF]

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the

other PSM items if necessary.

VOL (volume)

5 Finish the procedure.

Adjust the volume. [00 to 30 or 50*³]

When you adjust the bass, treble, or loudness,

the adjustment you have made is stored for

the currently selected sound mode (C-EQ)

including “USER.”

If you are using a two-speaker system, set the

fader level to “00.”

Depending on the amplifier gain control

setting. (See page 16 for details.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indications

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DEMO

Display demonstration

DEMO ON : [Initial]; Display demonstration will be activated

automatically if no operation is done for about

20 seconds, [6].

DEMO OFF : Cancels.

0 – 23 (1 – 12), [6]

[Initial: 0 (0:00)]

CLOCK H

Hour adjustment

00 – 59, [6]

[Initial: 00 (0:00)]

CLOCK M

Minute adjustment

24H/12H

Time display mode

12H O 24H, [6]

[Initial: 24H]

CLK ADJ*¹

Clock adjustment

AUTO

OFF

: [Initial]; The built-in clock is automatically adjusted

using the CT (clock time) data in the RDS signal.

: Cancels.

AF-REG*¹

Alternative frequency/

regionalization reception

When the received signals from the current FM RDS station or DAB

service become weak...

: [Initial]; Switches to another station (or service)

(the programme may differ from the one currently

received), [10, 18].

• The AF indicator lights up.

: Switches to another station broadcasting the same

programme.

• The AF and REG indicators light up.

: Cancels (not selectable when “DAB AF” is set to

“AF ON”).

AF REG

OFF

PTY-STBY*¹

PTY standby

Activates PTY Standby Reception with one of the PTY codes, [9].

OFF [Initial] = PTY codes, [10] = (back to the beginning)

TA VOL*¹

[Initial: VOL 15]; VOL 00 — VOL 30 or 50*², [9, 21]

Traffic announcement

volume

P-SEARCH*¹

Programme search

: Using the AF data, the unit tunes in to another

frequency broadcasting the same programme as the

original preset RDS station is if the preset station

signals are not sufficient.

OFF

: [Initial]; Cancels.

Only for FM RDS stations.

Depends on the amplifier gain control.

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indications

Selectable settings, [reference page]

DAB AF*³

AF ON

: [Initial]; Traces the programme among DAB services

Alternative frequency

reception

and FM RDS stations, [10, 18].

: Cancels.

AF OFF

DAB VOL*³

DAB volume adjustment

You can adjust the volume level (VOL –12 — VOL +12) of DAB

tuner to match the FM sound level and store it in memory.

[Initial: VOL 00]

DIMMER

Dimmer

OFF

: Dims the display illumination of this unit.

: [Initial]; Cancels.

TEL

MUTING 1/MUTING 2 : Select either one which mutes the sounds

Telephone muting

while using a cellular phone.

: [Initial]; Cancels.

OFF

SCROLL*⁴

Scroll

ONCE

AUTO

OFF

: [Initial]; Scrolls the disc information once.

: Repeats scrolling (5-second intervals in between).

: Cancels.

• Pressing DISP for more than one second can scroll the display

regardless of the setting.

EXT IN*⁵

CHANGER : [Initial]; To use a JVC CD changer, [10], an Apple

External input

iPod or a JVC D. player, [18].

: To use any other external component than the above,

EXT IN

[20].

TAG DISP

TAG ON

: [Initial]; Shows the Tag information while playing

Tag display

MP3/WMA tracks, [12].

TAG OFF : Cancels.

You can change the maximum volume level of this unit.

LOW PWR : VOL 00 – VOL 30 (Select this if the maximum power

of the speaker is less than 50 W to prevent them from

being damaged.)

AMP GAIN

Amplifier gain control

HIGH PWR : [Initial]; VOL 00 – VOL 50

IF BAND

Intermediate frequency

filter

AUTO

WIDE

: [Initial]; Increases the tuner selectivity to reduce

interference noises between close stations. (Stereo

effect may be lost.)

: Subject to interference noises from adjacent stations,

but sound quality will not be degraded and the stereo

effect will remain.

Displayed only when DAB tuner is connected.

Some characters or symbols will not be shown correctly (or will be blanked) on the display.

Displayed only when one of the following sources is selected—FM, AM, or DISC.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

⁄

Select a service (either primary or

secondary) to listen to.

DAB tuner operations

What is DAB system?

Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) can deliver

digital quality sound without any annoying

interference and signal distortion. Furthermore,

it can carry text, pictures, and data. When

transmitting, DAB combines several

programmes (called “services”) to form one

“ensemble.” In addition, each “service”—called

“primary service”—can also be divided into its

components (called “secondary service”). A

typical ensemble has six or more programmes

(services) broadcast at the same time.

By connecting the DAB tuner, this unit can do

the following:

To tune in to an ensemble manually

Start searching for an ensemble, as in step ! on

the left column.

2 Select the desired ensemble frequencies.

• Tracing the same programme automatically

—Alternative Frequency Reception (see

“DAB AF” on page 16).

It is recommended to use DAB tuner

KT-DB1000 with your unit. If you have

another DAB tuner, consult your JVC

IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

• Refer also to the Instructions supplied for

your DAB tuner.

Storing DAB services in memory

You can preset six DAB services (primary) for

each band.

1 Select a service you want (see steps ~

to ⁄ on the left column).

2 Select the preset number (1 – 6) you

want to store into.

Start searching for an ensemble.

When an ensemble is received, searching

stops.

Preset number flashes for a while.

To stop searching, press the same button

again.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tuning in to a preset DAB service

iPod®/D. player operations

This unit is ready for operating an Apple iPod

or a JVC D. player from the control panel.

Before operating your iPod or D. player:

Connect either one of the following (separately

purchased) to the CD changer jack on the rear

of this unit.

2 Select the preset DAB service

(primary) number (1 – 6) you want.

• Interface adapter for iPod —KS-PD100 for

controlling an iPod.

• D. player interface adapter—KS-PD500 for

controlling a D. player.

If the selected primary service has some

secondary services, pressing the same

button again will tune in to the secondary

services.

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

• For details, refer also to the manual supplied

with the interface adapter.

Tracing the same programme—

Alternative Frequency Reception

Caution:

You can keep listening to the same programme

by activating the Alternative Frequency

Reception.

Make sure to turn off this unit or turn off the

vehicle’s ignition switch before connecting

or disconnecting the iPod or D. player.

• While receiving a DAB service:

When driving in an area where a service

cannot be received, this unit automatically

tunes in to another ensemble or FM RDS

station, broadcasting the same programme.

• While receiving an FM RDS station:

When driving in an area where a DAB service

is broadcasting the same programme as the

FM RDS station is broadcasting, this unit

automatically tunes in to the DAB service.

Preparations:

Make sure “CHANGER” is selected for the

external input setting, see page 16.

When shipped from the factory, Alternative

Frequency Reception is activated.

To deactivate the Alternative Frequency

Reception, see page 15 and 16.

Playback starts automatically from

where it has been paused*¹or stopped*²

previously.

To change the display information while

tuning to an ensemble

Adjust the volume.

Service name = Ensemble name = Channel

number = Frequency = Clock = (back to the

beginning)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

3 Confirm the selection.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 13 and 14.)

• Make sure the equalizer on the iPod or

D. player is deactivated.

To move back to the previous

menu, press 5.

• If a track is selected, playback starts

automatically.

• If the selected item has another layer, you

will enter the layer. Repeat steps 2 and 3

until the desired track is played.

To pause*¹or

stop*²playback

To resume

playback, press it

again.

• Holding 4 /¢

can skip 10

items at a time.

To fast-forward or

reverse the track

The menu selecting mode will be canceled:

If no operations are done for about

–

5 seconds.

To go to the next

or previous tracks

–

When you confirm the selection of a track.

For iPod

For D. player

Selecting the playback modes

Selecting a track from the menu

1 Enter the main menu.

2 Select your desired playback mode.

Repeat play

Now the 5/∞/ 4 /¢

buttons

ONE RPT

work as the menu selecting buttons*³.

Functions the same as “Repeat One” of

the iPod or “Repeat Mode One” for the

D. player.

2 Select the desired menu.

ALL RPT

Functions the same as “Repeat All” of the

iPod or “Repeat Mode All” for the D. player.

For iPod:

RPT OFF

PLAYLIST Ô ARTISTS Ô ALBUMS Ô SONGS

Ô GENRES Ô COMPOSER Ô (back to the

beginning)

Cancels.

For D. player:

PLAYLIST Ô ARTIST Ô ALBUM Ô GENRE

Ô TRACK Ô (back to the beginning)

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Random play

Other external component

operations

You can connect an external component to

the CD changer jack on the rear using the Line

Input Adapter—KS-U57 (not supplied) or AUX

Input Adapter—KS-U58 (not supplied).

• For connection, see Installation/Connection

Manual (separate volume).

ALBM RND*⁴

Functions the same as “Shuffle Albums” of

the iPod.

SONG RND/RND ON

Functions the same as “Shuffle Songs” of the

iPod or “Random Play On” of the D. player.

For listening to the iPod or D. player, refer to

pages 18 – 20.

RND OFF

Cancels.

For iPod: Only if you select “ALL” in

“ALBUMS” of the main “MENU.”

If “EXT IN” does not appear, see page 16

and select the external input (“EXT IN”).

To check other information while listening to

an iPod or a D. player

Turn on the connected component

and start playing the source.

Adjust the volume.

⁄

Adjust the sound as you want. (See

pages 13 and 14.)

To check the clock time while listening to an

external component

EXT IN Ô Clock

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• When Alternative Frequency Reception

is activated (with AF selected), Network-

Tracking Reception is also activated

automatically. On the other hand, Network-

Tracking Reception cannot be deactivated

without deactivating Alternative Frequency

Reception. (See page 15.)

More about this unit

Basic operations

Turning on the power

• By pressing SRC button on the unit, you can

also turn on the power. If the source is ready,

playback also starts.

• If you want to know more about RDS, visit

«http://www.rds.org.uk».

Turning off the power

Disc operations

• If you turn off the power while listening to a

disc, disc play will start from where playback

has been stopped previously, next time you

turn on the power.

Caution for DualDisc playback

• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does

not comply with the “Compact Disc Digital

Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of Non-

DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may

not be recommended.

Tuner operations

Storing stations in memory

• During SSM search...

General

• This unit has been designed to reproduce

CDs/CD Texts, and CD-Rs (Recordable)/

CD-RWs (Rewritable) in audio CD (CD-DA),

MP3 and WMA formats.

• When a disc had been loaded, selecting

“DISC” for the playback source starts disc

play.

– All previously stored stations are erased and

stations are stored newly.

– Received stations are preset in No. 1 (lowest

frequency) to No. 6 (highest frequency).

– When SSM is over, the station stored in

No. 1 will be automatically tuned in.

• When storing a station manually, the

previously preset station is erased when a new

station is stored in the same preset number.

Inserting a disc

• When a disc is inserted upside down, the disc

automatically ejects.

• Do not insert 8 cm discs (single CD) and

unusual shape discs (heart, flower, etc.) into

the loading slot.

FM RDS operations

• Network-Tracking Reception requires

two types of RDS signals—PI (Programme

Identification) and AF (Alternative

Frequency) to work correctly. Without

receiving these data correctly, Network-

Tracking Reception will not operate correctly.

• If a Traffic Announcement is received by

TA Standby Reception, the volume level

automatically changes to the preset level (TA

VOL) if the current level is lower than the

preset level.

Playing a disc

• While fast-forwarding or reversing on an MP3

or WMA disc, you can only hear intermittent

sounds.

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

meeting the conditions below:

– Bit rate: 8 kbps — 320 kbps

Playing a CD-R or CD-RW

• Use only “finalized” CD-Rs or CD-RWs.

• This unit can play back only files of the same

type which are first detected if a disc includes

both audio CD (CD-DA) files and MP3/

WMA files.

• This unit can play back multi-session discs;

however, unclosed sessions will be skipped

while playing.

• Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs may not play

back on this unit because of their disc

characteristics, or for the following reasons:

– Discs are dirty or scratched.

– Moisture condensation occurs on the lens

inside the unit.

– The pickup lens inside the unit is dirty.

– CD-R/CD-RW on which the files are

written with “Packet Write” method.

– There are improper recording conditions

(missing data, etc.) or media conditions

(stained, scratched, warped, etc.).

• CD-RWs may require a longer readout time

since the reflectance of CD-RWs is lower than

that of regular CDs.

• Do not use the following CD-Rs or CD-RWs:

– Discs with stickers, labels, or a protective

seal stuck to the surface.

– Discs on which labels can be directly printed

by an ink jet printer.

– Sampling frequency:

48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz (for MPEG-1)

24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 16 kHz (for MPEG-2)

– Disc format: ISO 9660 Level 1/Level 2,

Romeo, Joliet, Windows long file name

• The maximum number of characters for file/

folder names vary among the disc format used

(includes 4 extension characters—<.mp3> or

<.wma>).

– ISO 9660 Level 1: up to 12 characters

– ISO 9660 Level 2: up to 31 characters

– Romeo: up to 128 characters

– Joliet: up to 64 characters

– Windows long file name: up to 128

characters

• This unit can play back files recorded in VBR

(variable bit rate).

Files recorded in VBR have a discrepancy

in elapsed time display, and do not show

the actual elapsed time. Especially, after

performing the search function, this

difference becomes noticeable.

• This unit can recognize a total of 512 files, of

200 folders, and of 8 hierarchies.

• This unit cannot play back the following files:

– MP3 files encoded with MP3i and

MP3 PRO format.

– MP3 files encoded in an inappropriate

format.

Using these discs under high temperatures or

high humidities may cause malfunctions or

damage to the unit.

– MP3 files encoded with Layer 1/2.

– WMA files encoded with lossless,

professional, and voice format.

Playing an MP3/WMA disc

• This unit can play back MP3/WMA files

with the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma>

(regardless of the letter case—upper/lower).

• This unit can show the names of albums,

artists (performer), and Tag (Version 1.0, 1.1,

2.2, 2.3, or 2.4) for MP3 files and for WMA

files.

• This unit can display only one-byte

characters. No other characters can be

correctly displayed.

– WMA files which are not based upon

Windows Media Audio.

– WMA files copy-protected with DRM.

– Files which have the data such as WAVE,

ATRAC3, etc.

• The search function works but search speed is

not constant.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Changing the source

• If you change the source, playback also stops

(without ejecting the disc).

Next time you select “DISC” for the playback

source, disc play starts from where it has been

stopped previously.

Notice:

When operating an iPod or a D. player,

some operations may not be performed

correctly or as intended. In this case, visit the

following JVC web site:

For iPod users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd100/index.html>

For D. player users: <http://www.jvc.co.jp/

english/car/support/ks-pd500/index.html>

Ejecting a disc

• If the ejected disc is not removed within

15 seconds, the disc is automatically inserted

again into the loading slot to protect it from

dust. (Disc will not play this time.)

Available characters on the display

Available characters

Display indications

General settings—PSM

• If you change the “AMP GAIN” setting from

“HIGH PWR” to “LOW PWR” while the

volume level is set higher than “VOL 30,” the

unit automatically changes the volume level to

“VOL 30.”

DAB tuner operations

• Only primary DAB services can be presetted

even when you store a secondary service.

• A previously preset DAB service is erased

when a new DAB service is stored in the same

preset number.

iPod® or D. player operations

• When you turn on this unit, the iPod or

D. player is charged through this unit.

• While the iPod or D. player is connected, all

operations from the iPod or D. player are

disabled. Perform all operations from this

unit.

• The text information may not be displayed

correctly.

– Some characters such as accented letters

cannot be shown correctly on the display.

– Depends on the condition of

communication between the iPod or

D. player and the unit.

• If the text information includes more than

8 characters, it scrolls on the display (see

also page 16). This unit can display up to 40

characters.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

When storing a disc into its case, gently insert

the disc around the center holder (with the

printed surface facing up).

Maintenance

• Make sure to store discs into the cases after

use.

How to clean the connectors

Frequent detachment will deteriorate the

connectors.

To keep discs clean

To minimize this possibility, periodically wipe

the connectors with a cotton swab or cloth

moistened with alcohol, being careful not to

damage the connectors.

A dirty disc may not play correctly.

If a disc does become dirty, wipe it

with a soft cloth in a straight line

from center to edge.

• Do not use any solvent (for example,

conventional record cleaner, spray, thinner,

benzine, etc.) to clean discs.

Connector

To play new discs

Moisture condensation

Moisture may condense on the lens inside the

CD player in the following cases:

• After starting the heater in the car.

• If it becomes very humid inside the car.

Should this occur, the CD player may

malfunction. In this case, eject the disc and

leave the unit turned on for a few hours until

the moisture evaporates.

New discs may have some rough

spots around the inner and outer

edges. If such a disc is used, this

unit may reject the disc.

To remove these rough spots, rub the edges

with a pencil or ball-point pen, etc.

Do not use the following discs:

Warped disc

How to handle discs

When removing a disc from

its case, press down the center

holder of the case and lift the disc

out, holding it by the edges.

• Always hold the disc by the

Center holder

Sticker

Sticker residue

Stick-on label

edges. Do not touch its recording surface.

Troubleshooting

What appears to be trouble is not always serious. Check the following points before calling a service

center.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Sound cannot be heard from the

speakers.

• Adjust the volume to the optimum level.

• Check the cords and connections.

• The unit does not work at all.

Reset the unit (see page 2).

Store stations manually.

• SSM automatic presetting does not

work.

• Static noise while listening to the

radio.

Connect the aerial firmly.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert the disc correctly.

• CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played

back.

• Tracks on the CD-R/CD-RW cannot

be skipped.

• Insert a finalized CD-R/CD-RW.

• Finalize the CD-R/CD-RW with the component

which you used for recording.

• Disc can be neither played back nor

ejected.

• Unlock the disc (see page 12).

• Eject the disc forcibly (see page 2).

• Disc sound is sometimes interrupted. • Stop playback while driving on rough roads.

• Change the disc.

• Check the cords and connections.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

• Disc cannot be played back.

Insert a playable disc into the loading slot.

• Use a disc with MP3/WMA tracks recorded in

the format compliant with ISO 9660 Level 1,

Level 2, Romeo, or Joliet.

• Add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

the file names.

• Noise is generated.

Skip to another track or change the disc. (Do not

add the extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> to

non-MP3 or WMA tracks.)

• A longer readout time is required

(“CHECK” keeps flashing on the

display).

Do not use too many hierarchies and folders.

• Tracks do not play back in the order Playback order is determined when the files are

you have intended them to play.

recorded.

• Elapsed playing time is not correct.

This sometimes occurs during play. This is caused

by how the tracks are recorded on the disc.

• “NO FILES” appears on the display.

Insert a disc that contains MP3/WMA tracks.

• Correct characters are not displayed

(e.g. album name).

This unit can only display letters (upper case),

numbers, and a limited number of symbols.

• “NO DISC” appears on the display.

• “NO MAG” appears on the display.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Insert a disc into the magazine.

Insert the magazine.

Connect this unit and the CD changer correctly

and press the reset button of the CD changer.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

Press the reset button of the CD changer.

• The CD changer does not work at all. Reset the unit (see page 2).

To be continued....

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symptoms

Remedies/Causes

• “noSIGNAL” appears on the display. Move to an area with stronger signals.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Connect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly

and reset the unit (see page 2).

• “ANTENANG” appears on the

display.

Check the cords and connections.

• The DAB tuner does not work at all. Reconnect this unit and the DAB tuner correctly

and reset the unit (see page 2).

• The iPod or D. player does not turn

on or does not work.

• Check the connecting cable and its connection.

• Update the firmware version.

•

Change the battery.

• Buttons do not work as intended.

• The sound is distorted.

The functions of the buttons have been changed.

Press MODE before performing the operation.

Deactivate the equalizer either on the unit or the

iPod/D. player.

• “NO IPOD” or “NO DP” appears on Check the connecting cable and its connection.

the display.

• Playback stops.

The headphones are disconnected during

playback. Restart the playback operation using

the control panel (see page 19).

• No sound can be heard when

connecting an iPod nano.

Disconnect the headphones from the iPod nano.

• No sound can be heard.

• “ERROR 01” appears on the display

when connecting a D. player.

Disconnect the adapter from the D. player. Then,

connect it again.

• “NO FILES” or “NO TRACK”

appears on the display.

No tracks are stored. Import tracks to the iPod or

D. player.

• “RESET 1” – “RESET 7” appears on

the display.

Disconnect the adapter from both the unit and

iPod/D. player. Then, connect it again.

• “RESET 8” appears on the display.

Check the connection between the adapter and

this unit.

• The iPod’s or D. player’s controls do Reset the iPod or D. player.

not work after disconnecting from

this unit.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specifications

AUDIO AMPLIFIER SECTION

CD PLAYER SECTION

Maximum Power Output:

Type: Compact disc player

Signal Detection System: Non-contact optical

pickup (semiconductor laser)

Front: 50 W per channel

Rear: 50 W per channel

Continuous Power Output (RMS):

Front: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz

to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%

total harmonic distortion.

Number of Channels: 2 channels (stereo)

Frequency Response: 5 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Dynamic Range:

96 dB

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 98 dB

Wow and Flutter: Less than measurable limit

MP3 Decoding Format:

Rear: 19 W per channel into 4 Ω, 40 Hz

to 20 000 Hz at no more than 0.8%

total harmonic distortion.

MPEG1/2 Audio Layer 3

Load Impedance: 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω allowance)

Tone Control Range:

Max. Bit Rate: 320 kbps

WMA (Windows Media Audio) Decoding

Bass:

10 dB at 100 Hz

Format:

Treble: 10 dB at 10 kHz

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 20 000 Hz

Signal-to-Noise Ratio: 70 dB

Line-Out Level/Impedance:

2.5 V/20 kΩ load (full scale)

Output Impedance: 1 kΩ

Max. Bit Rate: 192 kbps

GENERAL

Power Requirement:

Operating Voltage:

DC 14.4 V (11 V to 16 V allowance)

Grounding System: Negative ground

Allowable Operating Temperature:

0°C to +40°C

Other Terminal: CD changer

TUNER SECTION

Frequency Range:

Dimensions (W × H × D):

Installation Size (approx.):

182 mm × 52 mm × 150 mm

Panel Size (approx.):

188 mm × 58 mm × 11 mm

Mass (approx.):

FM1/FM2: 87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz

FM3:

AM:

65.00 MHz to 74.00 MHz

(MW) 522 kHz to 1 620 kHz

(LW) 144 kHz to 279 kHz

[FM Tuner]

Usable Sensitivity: 11.3 dBf (1.0 μV/75 Ω)

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

1.4 kg (excluding accessories)

16.3 dBf (1.8 μV/75 Ω)

Alternate Channel Selectivity (400 kHz): 65 dB

Frequency Response: 40 Hz to 15 000 Hz

Stereo Separation: 30 dB

Design and specifications are subject to change

without notice.

Capture Ratio: 1.5 dB

• Microsoft and Windows Media are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States

and/or other countries.

• iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

[MW Tuner]

Sensitivity: 20 μV

Selectivity: 35 dB

[LW Tuner]

Sensitivity: 50 μV

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Having TROUBLE with operation?

Please reset your unit

Refer to page of How to reset your unit

Затруднения при эксплуатации?

Пожалуйста, перезагрузите Ваше устройство

Для получения информации о перезагрузке Вашего устройства

обратитесь на соответствующую страницу

EN, RU

1105DTSMDTJEIN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

KD-G427

Installation/Connection Manual

Руководство по установке/подключению

1105DTSMDTJEIN

EN, RU

GET0353-002A

[EE]

ENGLISH

РУССКИЙ

This unit is designed to operate on 12 V DC, NEGATIVE ground electrical systems. If your vehicle

does not have this system, a voltage inverter is required, which can be purchased at JVC IN-CAR

ENTERTAINMENT dealers.

Это устройство разработано для эксплуатации на 12 В постоянного напряжения с минусом на

массе. Если Ваш автомобиль не имеет этой системы, требуется инвертор напряжения, который

может быть приобретен у дилера автомобилнего специалиста JVC.

WARNINGS

ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЯ

To prevent short circuits, we recommend that you disconnect the battery’s negative terminal and make all Для предотвращения коротких замыканий мы рекомендуем Вам отсоединить отрицательный

electrical connections before installing the unit.

• Be sure to ground this unit to the car’s chassis again after installation.

разъем аккумулятора и осуществить все подключения перед установкой устройства.

• После установки обязательно заземлите данное устройство на шасси автомобиля.

Notes:

Примечания:

• Replace the fuse with one of the specified rating. If the fuse blows frequently, consult your JVC IN-CAR • Заменяйте предохранитель другим предохранителем указанного класса. Если предохранитель

ENTERTAINMENT dealer.

сгорает слишком часто, обратитесь к дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC.

• Рекомендуется подключать динамики с максимальной мощностью более 50 Вт (к задней и

передней панели устройства, с полным сопротивлением от 4 Ω до 8 Ω). Если максимальная

мощность динамиков менее 50 Вт, перейдите в режим “AMP GAIN”, чтобы предотвратить их

повреждение (см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 16).

• It is recommended to connect to the speakers with maximum power of more than 50 W (both at

the rear and at the front, with an impedance of 4 Ω to 8 Ω). If the maximum power is less than

50 W, change “AMP GAIN” setting to prevent the speakers from being damaged (see page 16 of the

INSTRUCTIONS).

• To prevent short-circuit, cover the terminals of the UNUSED leads with insulating tape.

• The heat sink becomes very hot after use. Be careful not to touch it when removing this unit.

• Для предотвращения короткого замыкания заклейте НЕИСПОЛЬЗУЕМЫЕ концы изолирующей

лентой.

• Радиатор во время использования сильно нагревается. Старайтесь его не трогать во время

удаления устройства.

Heat sink

Радиатор

PRECAUTIONS on power supply and speaker connections:

• DO NOT connect the speaker leads of the power cord to the car battery; otherwise, the unit

will be seriously damaged.

• BEFORE connecting the speaker leads of the power cord to the speakers, check the speaker wiring in

your car.

ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЯ по питанию и подключению

громкоговорителей:

• НЕ подключайте провода громкоговорителей к аккумулятору автомобиля, иначе

устройство будет повреждено.

• ПЕРЕД подключением проводов громкоговорителей к кабелю питания громкоговорителя

проверьте схему соединений громкоговорителей в Вашем автомобиле.

Parts list for installation and connection

Список деталей для установки и подключения

Следующие детали поставлены в комплекте с устройством.

При отсутствии какого-либо элемента немедленно свяжитесь с дилером автомобильного

специалиста JVC.

The following parts are provided for this unit.

If any item is missing, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer immediately.

A / B

Sleeve

Муфта

Trim plate

Декоративную панель

Hard case/Control panel

Жесткий футляр/панель управления

Washer (ø5)

Шайба (њ5)

Mounting bolt (M5 × 20 mm)

Крепежный болт (M5 × 20 мм)

Power cord

Кабель питания

Lock nut (M5)

Фиксирующая гайка (M5)

Rubber cushion

Резиновый чехол

Handles

Рычаги

Remote controller

диcтaнциoннoго yпpaвлeния

Battery

Бaтapeйкa

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

INSTALLATION (IN-DASH MOUNTING)

The following illustration shows a typical installation. If you have any questions or require information

УСТАНОВКА (УСТАНОВКА В ПРИБОРНУЮ ПАНЕЛЬ)

На следующих иллюстрациях показана типовая установка. Если у Вас есть какие-либо вопросы,

regarding installation kits, consult your JVC IN-CAR ENTERTAINMENT dealer or a company supplying касающиеся установки, обратитесь к Вашему дилеру автомобилнего специалиста JVC или в

kits.

компанию, поставляющую соответствующие принадлежности.

• Если Вы не знаете точно, как следует устанавливать это устройство, обратитесь к

квалифицированному специалисту.

• If you are not sure how to install this unit correctly, have it installed by a qualified technician.

Do the required electrical connections.

Выполните необходимые подключения

контактов, как показано на оборотной

стороне этой инструкции.

When you stand the unit, be

careful not to damage the fuse

on the rear.

Устанавливайте устройство

таким образом, чтобы не

повредить предохранитель,

расположенный сзади.

Bend the appropriate tabs to hold the

sleeve firmly in place.

Отогните соответствующие

фиксаторы, предназначенные для

прочной установки корпуса.

Removing the unit

Удаление устройства

Before removing the unit, release the rear section.

Перед удалением устройства освободите заднюю часть.

Insert the two handles, then pull them as

illustrated so that the unit can be removed.

Вставьте два рычажка, затем потяните их,

как показано на рисунке, чтобы вынуть

устройство.

When using the optional stay / При использовании

дополнительной стойки

When installing the unit without using the sleeve / При установке устройства без

использования муфты

In a Toyota car for example, first remove the car radio and install the unit in its place.

В автомобилях “Toyota”, например, сначала удалите автомобильную магнитолу, затем установите на ее место

это устройство.

Fire wall

Стена

Stay (option)

Стойка (дополнительно)

*²Not supplied for this unit.

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*²

*²Не входят в комплект.

Dashboard

Приборная панель

Bracket*²

Кронштейн*²

Screw (option)

Винт (дополнительно)

Flat type screws (M5 × 8 mm)*²

Крепежные винты (M5 × 8 мм)*²

Pocket

Карман

Bracket*²

Кронштейн*²

Note

: When installing the unit on the mounting bracket, make sure to use the 8 mm-long screws. If longer

screws are used, they could damage the unit.

Install the unit at an angle of less than 30˚.

Установите устройство под углом менее 30°.

Примечание : При установке устройства на крепежный кронштейн, используйте только винты длиной 8 мм.

При использовании более длинных винтов можно повредить устройство.

TROUBLESHOOTING

BЫЯВЛЕНИЕ НЕИСПРАВНОСТЕЙ

• The fuse blows.

• Сработал предохранитель.

* Are the red and black leads connected correctly?

* Правильно ли подключены черный и красный провода?

• Питание не включается.

* Подключен ли желтый провод?

• Power cannot be turned on.

* Is the yellow lead connected?

• Звук не выводится через громкоговорители.

* Нет ли короткого замыкания на кабеле выхода громкоговорителей?

• No sound from the speakers.

* Is the speaker output lead short-circuited?

• Звук искажен.

• Sound is distorted.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?

* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L) громкоговорителей?

• Шум мешает звучанию.

* Соединен ли находящийся сзади зажим заземления с шасси автомобиля с помощью более

короткого и тонкого шнуров?

• Noise interfere with sounds.

* Is the rear ground terminal connected to the car’s chassis using shorter and thicker cords?

• Unit becomes hot.

* Is the speaker output lead grounded?

* Are the “–” terminals of L and R speakers grounded in common?

• Устройство нагревается.

* Заземлен ли провод выхода громкоговорителей?

* Заземлены ли разъемы “–” правого (R) и левого (L) громкоговорителей?

• This unit does not work at all.

* Have you reset your unit?

• Приемник не работает.

* Выполнена ли перенастройка приемника?

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

РУССКИЙ

ENGLISH

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

ЭЛЕКТРИЧЕСКИЕ ПОДКЛЮЧЕНИЯ

If your car is equipped with the ISO connector / For some VW/Audi or Opel (Vauxhall) automobile / Для некоторых автомобилей VW/Audi

Если автомобиль оснащен разъемом ISO

или Opel (Vauxhall)

• Connect the ISO connectors as illustrated.

• Подключите разъемы ISO, как показано на рисунке.

You may need to modify the wiring of the supplied power cord as illustrated.

• Contact your authorized car dealer before installing this unit.

Возможно, потребуется изменить схему соединений для прилагаемого шнура питания, как показано на рисунке.

• Перед установкой приемника обратитесь к авторизованному агенту по продажам автомобильных систем.

Original wiring / Исходная схема соединений

Modified wiring 1 / Преобразованная схема соединений 1

From the car body

От корпуса автомобиля

ISO connector

Разъем ISO

Use modified wiring 2 if the unit does not turn on.

Если приемник не включается, используйте преобразованную

схему соединений 2.

ISO connector of the supplied power cord

Разъем ISO шнура питания, входящего в

комплект поставки

Modified wiring 2 / Преобразованная схема соединений 2

View from the lead side

Вид со стороны выводов

Y: Yellow

R: Red

Красный

Желтый

Connections without using the ISO connectors / Подключение без использования разъемов ISO

Before connecting: Check the wiring in the vehicle carefully. Incorrect connection may cause

serious damage to this unit.

The leads of the power cord and those of the connector from the car body may be different in color.

Перед началом подключений: Тщательно проверьте проводку в автомобиле.

Неправильное подключение может привести к серьезному повреждению устройства.

Жилы силового кабеля и жилы соединителя от кузова автомобиля могут быть разного цвета.

1 Cut the ISO connector.

1 Обрежьте разъем ISO.

2 Connect the colored leads of the power cord in the order specified in the illustration below.

3 Connect the aerial cord.

2 Подсоедините цветные провода шнура питания в указанном ниже порядке.

3 Подключите кабель антенны.

4 Finally connect the wiring harness to the unit.

4 В последнюю очередь подключите электропроводку к устройству.

To external components (see diagram

К внешним устройствам (см. схему

)

Rear ground

terminal

Задний

разъем

заземления

15 A fuse

Предохранитель 15 A

Not supplied for this unit.

Не входит в комплект.

Ignition switch

Переключатель зажигания

Line out (see diagram

К выходу (см. схему

)

Aerial terminal

Разъем антенны

Black

Черный

To metallic body or chassis of the car

К металлическому корпусу или шасси автомобиля

Yellow*²

Желтый*²

To a live terminal in the fuse block connecting to the car battery (bypassing the

ignition switch) (constant 12 V)

К разъему фазы в блоке предохранителя (минуя блок зажигания)

(постоянный 12 В)

Fuse block

Блок предохранителя

Before checking the operation of this unit prior to

installation, this lead must be connected, otherwise power

cannot be turned on.

Перед проверкой работы устройства подключите этот

провод, иначе питание не включится.

Red

Красный

To an accessory terminal in the fuse block

К вспомогательному разъему в блоке предохранителя

Blue with white stripe

Синий с белой полосой

To the remote lead of other equipment or power aerial if any (200 mA max.)

К удаленному проводу другого оборудования или антенны (макс. 200 мА)

Brown

Коричневый

To cellular phone system

К системе сотового телефона

White with black stripe

Белый с черной

полосой

White

Белый

Gray with black stripe

Серый с черной

полосой

Gray

Серый

Green with black stripe

Зеленый с черной

полосой

Green

Зеленый

Purple with black stripe

Пурпурный с черной

полосой

Purple

Пурпурный

Right speaker (rear)

Правый громкоговоритель

(задний)

Left speaker (front)

Левый громкоговоритель (передний)

Right speaker (front)

Правый громкоговоритель

(передний)

Left speaker (rear)

Левый громкоговоритель (задний)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Connecting the external amplifier / Подключение внешних усилителей

You can connect an amplifier to upgrade your car stereo system.

• Connect the remote lead (blue with white stripe) to the remote lead of the other equipment so that it

can be controlled through this unit.

• Disconnect the speakers from this unit, connect them to the amplifier. Leave the speaker

leads of this unit unused.

Можно подключить усилители для обновления автомобильной стереосистемы.

• Подсоедините провод внешнего устройства (синий с белой полосой) к проводу внешнего

устройства другого оборудования так, чтобы им можно было управлять с этого устройства.

• Отсоедините громкоговорители от данного устройства, подключите их к усилителю.

Оставьте провода громкоговорителей данного устройства неиспользованными.

Remote lead

Провод внешнего устройства

Y-connector (not supplied for this unit)

Разъем Y (не входит в комплект поставки)

Rear speakers

Задние

громкоговорители

To the remote lead of other equipment or power

aerial if any

К удаленному проводу другого оборудования

Remote lead (Blue with white stripe)

Провод внешнего устройства (Синий с белой полосой)

или антенны

Firmly attach the ground wire to the

JVC Amplifier

JVC-усилитель

metallic body or to the chassis of the

car—to the place uncoated with paint

(if coated with paint, remove the paint

before attaching the wire). Failure to do

so may cause damage to the unit.

Плотно прикрепите заземляющий

провод к металлическому кузову

или шасси автомобиля—в месте,

не покрытом краской (если оно

покрыто краской, удалите краску

перед тем, как прикреплять провод).

Невыполнение этого требования

может привести к повреждению

данного устройства.

Rear speakers

Задние громкоговорители

Front speakers (see diagram

Передние громкоговорители

)

(см. схему

)

Cut the rear speaker leads of the car’s ISO

connector and connect them to the amplifier.

Обрежьте выводы задних динамиков для

разъема ISO автомобиля и подсоедините

их к усилителю.

Signal cord (not supplied for this unit)

Кабель сигнала (не входит в комплект поставки)

Connecting the external components / Подключение внешних устройств

CD changer, DAB tuner, Apple iPod®, or JVC D. player / Устройство автоматической смены компакт-дисков, тюнер DAB, проигрыватель Apple iPod®

или JVC D.

•

Set “CHANGER” for the external input setting (See page 16 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Установите для внешнего входа значение “CHANGER” (см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 16.)

• You can connect both components in series as illustrated below. The iPod*⁶or D. player can be connected using an interface adapter (not supplied)—KS-PD100 (for iPod) or KS-PD500 (for D. player).

• Эти внешние устройства можно подключать параллельно, как показано на рисунке. Проигрыватель iPod*⁶или D. можно подключить с помощью интерфейсного адаптера (не входит в комплект

поставки)—KS-PD100 (для iPod) или KS-PD500 (для проигрывателя D.).

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod (продается отдельно)

Connection 1 (integrated connection) / Соединение 1 (интегрированное соединение)

или

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

Проигрыватель JVC D. (продается отдельно)

JVC CD changer

Проигрыватель

нескольких

JVC DAB tuner

Тюнер DAB JVC

компакт-дисков JVC

CD changer jack

Разъем устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков

Apple iPod (separately purchased)

Apple iPod (продается отдельно)

Connection 2 (alternative connection) / Соединение 2 (альтернативное соединение)

или

JVC D. player (separately purchased)

Проигрыватель JVC D. (продается отдельно)

JVC CD changer

JVC DAB tuner

Тюнер DAB JVC

или

Проигрыватель

нескольких компакт-

дисков JVC

CD changer jack

Разъем устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

iPod является торговой маркой Apple Computer, Inc., зарегистрированной в США и других странах.

CAUTION / ПРЕДОСТЕРЕЖЕНИЕ:

Connecting cord supplied for your CD changer or DAB tuner

Подключение кабеля, входящего в комплект поставки устройства автоматической смены компакт-дисков

или тюнера DAB

• Before connecting the external components, make sure that the unit is turned off.

• Перед подключением внешних компонентов убедитесь в том, что устройство выключено.

Other external component / Другое внешнее устройство

•

Set “EXT IN” for the external input setting (See page 16 of the INSTRUCTIONS.) / Установите для внешнего входа значение “EXT IN” (см. ИНСТРУКЦИИ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ на стр. 16.)

External component

Внешнее устройство

CD changer jack

Разъем устройства

автоматической

смены компакт-дисков

Line Input Adapter KS-U57 (not supplied for this unit)

Коммуникационный адаптер KS-U57 (не входит в комплект

поставки)

External component

Внешнее устройство

3.5 mm stereo mini plug

Мини-разъем стерео-3,5 мм

AUX Input Adapter KS-U58 (not supplied for this unit)

Адаптер для подключения дополнительных устройств

KS-U58 (не входит в комплект поставки)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ingersoll Rand Impact Driver 772 User Manual
Intel Computer Hardware 8I945PE FS User Manual
JAI Security Camera TM TMC 4200CL User Manual
Jenn Air Refrigerator JWC2450ARB User Manual
JVC Stereo System UX V55R User Manual
Kenwood Car Amplifier KAC 8105D User Manual
Kenwood Portable CD Player DPC MP727 User Manual
Kenwood Range CK 300 User Manual
KitchenAid Ice Maker KUIS155HBL3 User Manual
Kramer Electronics Webcam RC 10TB User Manual